Customer ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows Customer ledger windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Customer ledger workspace. ## Transactions [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) ## Registers [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) ## Processes [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) [Reprint invoices (AR50801S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s/) [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) [Process customer refunds (AR50300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s/) [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) [Update discounts (AR502500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500/) [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) [Close financial periods (AR509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000/) [Validate customer balances (AR509900)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900/) [Change customer details (AR50107S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s/) ## Inquiries [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/) [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) [Statement history summary (AR404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000/) [Statement history details (AR404300)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300/) [Incoming payments history (AR407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000/) [Customer statement history (AR404600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600/) [Commission details (AR403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000/) [Sales profitability analysis (AR409000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000/) [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) [Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s/) [Sales by item and customer (AR40103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-by-item-and-customer-ar40103s/) [Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-overview-ar40104s/) [GDPR - personal data (GA000081)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081/) [Invoice history by item (AR40105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s/) ## Reports [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/): Displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. [Customer summary (AR65050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/): Lists all the customers with their current balances, default currency, payment terms, VAT zone, and other related information. [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/): Displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. [Aged past due (AR631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/): Lists the customers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days past due. [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): Displays the customers with outstanding foreign currency balances. The balances are broken down by days past due. [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/): Shows the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. The foreign currency balances and amounts are shown in their original currency. [Aged period sensitive (AR630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. [Incoming payments (AR63050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s/): Displays the list of incoming payments. [Customer profiles (AR651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000/): Shows all the details from the database of the selected customer account or all customer accounts. [Customer history summary (AR652100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100/): Shows a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the date range you specify. [Customer specification (AR65200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s/): Shows the ending and beginning balances of the selected customer. [Unreleased transactions (AR611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000/): Lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can choose a specific customer or view the documents for all customers. [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): Displays, with all details, the list of customer ledger documents of the chosen type that were entered but not released. [Customer documents (AR621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): Lists all the documents released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected customer (or all customers). [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): Shows the details of documents of the selected type (or all types) released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. [Batch register customers (AR620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-ar620500/): Displays the list of all batches released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-detailed-ar621000/): Lists all batches (with details) released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): Lets you view and print the list of Customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the profitability data for each day within the specified date range. [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales order. [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on item class basis on the sales occurred during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by stock items. ## Preferences [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) [Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/) [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) Apply payments automatically (AR506000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000 page You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply payments automatically (AR506000) You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. You should apply payments and calculate any overdue charges before preparing statements, to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. For details, see [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the application process for the customer accounts that belong to the statement cycles you have selected by using the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the application process for customer accounts that belong to all statement cycles displayed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can select the date of payment application and the financial period. Also, you can select whether to include credit notes in the auto-application process and whether to release batches with the application records when the process is complete.
Element Description
Date

The date when an application is performed. By default, the current business date is displayed.

The system records this date for each payment document or credit notes (if credit notes were included in the auto-application process) in the Date field on the top part of the Customer payments (AR302000) window.

Financial period The financial period when the application is performed. The field is filled in automatically, based on the selected date.
Apply credit notes

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system includes credit notes in the application process.

The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents.

Release batch when finished

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system releases batches with the application records when the process is complete.

If you leave the check box cleared, when the process is complete, you need to release the application records manually for each payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window or by using the Release customer documents (AR501000) mass processing window.

Include child documents

An indicator of the types of documents that belong to any child customer accounts that should be processed, along with the documents of these customer accounts. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that none of the documents of the child customer accounts should be processed.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All types
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria. The option is available if the Apply credit note check box is selected in the window.

The option you select is used by the system for parent accounts that have child accounts with the Consolidate balance check box selected on the Invoicing information tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

This box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.

## The table This table contains information about statement cycles. You can select the statement cycles to define a group of customer accounts for which the system will run the auto-application process.
Column Description
Cycle ID The unique ID of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statement was last prepared.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Next statement date The date of the next statement, according to the cycle parameters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Availability calculation rules (IN201500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/availability-calculation-rules-in201500 page In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Availability calculation rules (IN201500) In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You can add new rules, modify existing rules, and delete unused rules if they are not assigned to any item classes. For more information, see [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). You can view the availability data for each item in the [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this part, you set the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to the item class to which this availability calculation rule is assigned.
Element Description
Availability calculation rule The unique ID of the availability calculation rule. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the availability calculation rule.
Deduct qty. on open issues

If you select this check box, the system deducts (for items of the class) the quantities of issued items from the available quantities of these items.

The documents in the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Deduct qty. on sales on hold

If you select this check box, the system will deduct the quantities of the item on sales orders (of the SO, IN, and CS types) with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Rejected statuses from the available quantity.

The quantity of each item on sales orders with these statuses is shown in the Sales order prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on sales orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items on sales orders with the Open status from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders booked field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. on shipments

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of shipped items from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders shipped field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. allocated

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items being prepared for shipping (on unconfirmed shipments) and the quantities that were specifically allocated for sales orders (of the SA and SO types) from the available quantities of these stock items. The orders with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open statuses are used for this calculation.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders allocated field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated for kit assembly from the available quantities of these items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Deduct qty. on back orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated to sales orders with the Back order status from the available quantity of these items.

The quantities on these sales orders are shown in the Back orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on inventory receipts (with On hold and Balanced statuses) in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. in transit If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items in transit in the available quantities of these stock items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Include qty. on purchase order receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on unreleased purchase receipts in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. on purchase on hold

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on purchase orders (with the statuses of On hold and Pending approval ) in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses is shown in the Purchase prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. on purchase orders

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on open purchase orders in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the Open status is shown in the Purchase orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Include qty. of kit assembly supply

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items that are kits and listed in the kit assembly documents in the available quantities of these items.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Include qty. on returns

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on return orders and on shipments with the Receipt operation selected (in the Shipments (SO302000) window) in the available quantities of these items. In particular, quantities are affected as follows:

  • The quantities on return orders with the On hold status are deducted from the Sales order prepared quantities.
  • The quantities on return orders with the Open status are deducted from the Sales orders booked quantities.
  • The quantities on unconfirmed shipments with the Receipt operation are deducted from the Sales orders allocated quantities.
  • The quantities on confirmed shipments are deducted from the Sales orders shipped quantities.

Thus, the quantities on shipments with the Receipt operation decrease the Total deduction quantities in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Calculate commissions (AR505500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500 page In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate commissions (AR505500) In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each invoice contains the commission details, which are calculated based on the number of salespersons associated with the invoice and their percentages. Commission earned can be collected over all the invoices or over the paid invoices only, depending on the **Salesperson commission by** option selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you prepare commissions once per commission period, just before closing the period. In commission calculation for the open commission period, all invoices that match the conditions of commission calculation and have dates earlier than the ending date of period are included. Thus, you need not recalculate commission for the period if some of the related documents are entered into the system later; they will be included in calculation for the next commission period. To repeat the process of preparing the commissions for the commission period if salespersons were incorrectly specified on invoices for the period, you must first void the prepared commissions by using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window, and then prepare them again. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process all Initiates commission processing for the period.
Review commission period Navigates to Close commission period (AR506500) window so that you can close the period for which commissions have been prepared.
## The top part In this area, you can view read-only information for the commission period, which is the oldest open period on the list of commission periods.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be collected. Commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status The status of the commission period. You can prepare commissions only for an open period.
From The start date of the commission period.
To The end date of the commission period.
## The table This table displays the list of salespersons with their commissions calculated for the period specified in the upper area of the window.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the line.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Documents The number of documents involved.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that commission calculation was based on.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Average commission % The average commission percent on the documents during the specified period.
Minimum commission (%) The minimum commission percent during the specified period.
Maximum commission (%) The maximum commission percent during the specified period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000 page You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. The overdue documents can be selected by statement cycle, customer class, and customer. As a result of processing, the system generates customer ledger documents of the **Overdue charge** type with the **Balanced** or **On hold** status depending on the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can further process generated documents by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The system calculates overdue charges for all customer accounts for which overdue charges are assigned, except for accounts with the **Inactive** or **On hold** status. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Also make sure that the option **Apply overdue charges** is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **General information** tab, the **Financial settings** section. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Calculate Finds the overdue documents that meet the selection criteria and calculates the amounts of overdue charges for the documents in accordance with the overdue charge code settings in the Overdue charges (AR204500) window.
Process Processes the overdue charges for the documents you have selected, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Process all Processes the overdue charges for all the listed documents, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
View last charge Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window and displays the details of the unreleased overdue charge document that had been generated for the selected overdue document.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area (described in the following table) to select the date and the financial period for the charges, and the criteria for the overdue documents to be displayed.
Element Description
Overdue charge date The date when overdue charges are calculated and appropriate documents are created.
Period The financial period to which the document’s transactions should be posted.
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which you want to display data. Leave the field blank if you want to calculate charges for all cycles. If the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, you must specify the statement cycle.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer The customer account for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table This table contains the list of overdue documents with relevant details for each document, including the amounts of overdue charges. > [!NOTE] > Overdue documents appear in the table only after you click **Calculate** in the window toolbar to find overdue documents and calculate overdue charges for them.
Element Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include the document for processing.
Type The type of customer ledger document for which overdue charges were calculated: Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge.
Reference no. The reference number of the document, which was assigned by a number series. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view document details.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended, by its ID.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it appears in the system.
Currency The currency of the original document.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Open balance The amount of the original document to which payments were not applied.
Last payment date The date of the last applied payment.
Last charge date The date of the last overdue charge document generated for this document.
Overdue days The number of days this document is past due since its due date or, if overdue charges were previously calculated, since the last charge date.
Charge currency The currency used for the overdue charges.
Charge amount The amount of the charge.
Branch

The branch as retrieved from the Branch field on the Financial details tab in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Cash sales (AR304000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000 section You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash sales (AR304000) You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. The resulting document generated upon release of a cash sale is a fully paid invoice, which can be cleared right away. The default status of a newly created document is defined by the **Hold documents on entry** and **Validate document**totals on entry options in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If the **Hold documents on**entry option is selected, the default status will be **On hold**, whether or not the document is balanced. For more information, see: [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/). If a cash sale is subjected to bank charges for payment processing, you can specify these charges on the **Finance charges** tab. As with other customer payments, a cash sale can be included in a batch deposit. For details, see: [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases balanced cash sale documents.
Reverse Generates a cash return document with transactions reversed with respect to the original document. If a processing centre confirms voiding or refunding, the system marks the cash return document as Closed.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Email invoice/note
Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing.
Send email
Opens the Activity dialog box,which you can use to create an email.
Reclassify general ledger batch
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, on which you can initiate the reclassification process. For more information, see Process splitting.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details menu command, which you can click to quickly navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) inquiry window.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
## The top part In the top part of the window, you can create a new cash sales document or select an existing document for modification.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Cash sale
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided that were paid in full immediately.
Cash return
A document that reverses the transactions generated by the cash sale document.
Ref.no The reference number of the document, as automatically generated by the system in accordance with the number series assigned to cash sales in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the document, which is one of the following:

On hold
The user can edit the document but cannot release it.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT total value equals the Balance value. The document maybe released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Open
The document has been released. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document is zero.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft and has the On hold status. Such a document may be edited and cannot be released.
Date The date when the customer ledger document was created. By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but the date may be changed.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted. By default, it is the current period, but the period can be changed. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Payment ref. The reference number of the customer payment.
Invoice text Any user-provided description of the cash sale document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Location The relevant customer location.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer to pay for the invoice.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account debited as a result of the cash sale transaction.
Currency The currency of the document. Initially, it is the customer’s default currency, but you can change it if the Allow currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window for this customer. To view or change the exchange rate, click the second field, which contains the exchange rate, to invoke the Rate selection dialog box.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Detail total The document total, as calculated for all items on the Document details tab.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is a subject to value-added tax (VAT).

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT exempt total

The total VAT amount that is exempted from charging.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The document VAT amount; the details are shown on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original document amount and the rounded amount.

The field appears only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Payment amount The amount of the customer payment.
Cash discount taken

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms. If a document has the On holdor Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT window.

Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges The total amount of the bank charges that were deducted by the bank from the payment amount on the cash account. Even if the charges were actually deducted by the bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the line item or provides theservice.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable. Only anon-stock item can be selected.
Transaction descr. Any brief comment relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of items (goods or services) of a particular type sold to the customer.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price The price set for the item with respect to the specified unit.
Manual amount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount percent The percent of the discount that has been applied manually. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually to this line. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Amount The amount after the discount has been applied.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used for this transaction.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been activated and integrated with this workspace.
Salesperson ID The salesperson responsible for the sale.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the Cash return documents created by the reversing process. It shows the identifier of the deferral schedule associated with the original Cash sale document.

Note

If a Cash return document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the original documents, this column remains empty.

Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the line item, if any.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.

Term start date The start date of the term.
Term end date The end date of the term.
VAT category The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. The category represents the type of goods or services. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer's VAT zone and payment terms. Also, the tab specifies the work group associated with the document and the commissions calculated on document details. For a released customer ledger document, the tab contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions on posting.
Branch The branch with which this document is associated.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document The original document in general ledger.
### The Payment info section
Element Description
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the cash sale document has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale should be deposited. You can change this option if the status of cash account has been changed. Deposits can be performed only from a clearing account.
Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been deposited.
Batch deposit date The date when the cash sale was deposited.
Batch deposit no. The reference number of the batch deposit that includes this cash sale.
### The VAT info section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone By default, the VAT zone associated with the customer location, as specified in the Customer locations (CR303010) window. If this VAT zone is not specified, it is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner ID The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoice address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is not the default invoicing address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postal code for the invoicing address. An input mask for postal codes be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the customer’s invoicing address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information and type new information in the following elements.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer as a printed document.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer by email.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the taxes to be paid on the cash sale and is filled out automatically for a new document after you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of a VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, calculated at the document level.
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. You calculate commissions in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons. ### The top part
Element Description
Default salesperson The identifier of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges applied to the cash sale by the bank for payment processing. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Entry type The charge, selected by its entry type ID. You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.
Description A detailed description of the entry type to be used as finance charge.
Offset account The account that is used for this finance charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this finance charge.
Amount The amount of the finance charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Change customer details (AR50107S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer details (AR50107S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to change the column information of the customer(s) you have selected in the table.
Process all Click this to change the column information of all customers that are displayed in the table, according to the filter you have set in the top part of the window.
## The top part ### The Filter values section
Element Description
Customer class The customers included in the customer class selected here will be displayed in the table.
Status The customers whose status is accordant with the status you select here will be displayed in the table.
VAT zone ID The customers whose VAT zone is accordant with the VAT zone you select here will be displayed in the table.
### The Change values section
Element Description
Change column information

Select the column you want to change. The options are:

  • Customer class
  • VAT zone
  • Exclude from EC sales list (Brexit) When you select this, the check box Exclude from EC sales list will be selected for the customer(s) you want to change this column for.
New customer class When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, here you can select the new customer class to which you want to change.
Update the customer’s settings with the customer class defaults When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, you can select this check box if you want to update the customer’s settings with the default settings of the new customer class.
New VAT zone ID When you select VAT zone as the column you want to change, here you can select the new VAT zone ID to which you want to change.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
VAT zone The current VAT zone of the customer.
Location ID The location ID of the customer.
Address The address of the customer.
Postcode The postcode of the customer.
City The city of the customer.
Country The country of the customer.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the customer.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person. Inherited from the customer details in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Phone 1 The phone number of the customer.
Email The email of the customer.
Last sale The date when the last sale was made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer.
Customer class The customer class to which the customer belongs.
Exclude EC sales list When this check box is selected, the customer on the row and their transactions will not be included in the EC sales list.
Close commission period (AR506500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500 page In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close commission period (AR506500) In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. You can also close a commission period for which commissions have been calculated in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. Also, you can reopen the last closed period and void any prepared commissions. Before you open the latest closed period, make sure the commission for the current period has not been calculated or has been voided. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions
Void commissions
Removes information about prepared commissions from the document database. Reopen a period if you need to void commission for the closed period.
Close period
Closes the selected commission period. Only a period for which commission has been prepared (calculated) can be closed.
Reopen period
Reopens the last closed period, so that the commission for the period can be voided and recalculated.
## The top part In this area, you can select a commission period to view its details or to close it.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be calculated. Commission periods are defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

A read-only box that displays the status of the commission period. The following values are used:

Prepared
Commission was calculated for the period.
Closed
The period is closed.
Open
The commission was not yet calculated for the period.
From A read-only field that shows the start date of the commission period.
To A read-only field that shows the end date of the commission period.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of salespersons, which includes summary information about commissions they have earned during the selected period.
Column Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window so you can view the details of the commission for the selected period.
Salesperson ID The unique ID of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the row.
Type The type of the salesperson, which can be one of the following options: Supplier or Employee. This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that was used as the base for commission calculation.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Payroll processed date The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module. Available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Close financial periods (AR509000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (AR509000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To allow posting to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

Note

The green OK icon appears if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.

Unreleased documents Opens the Unreleased customer ledger document report so you can view documents that are not released in the selected period (documents that have On hold, Balanced, Pending print, or Pending email status).
## The table This table displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. A period can be closed only if there no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** status to be posted to this period. You select one or more periods for closing and click **Close periods**. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is active.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Commission details (AR403000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000 page You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Commission details (AR403000) You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. You can select a salesperson, a commission period, a customer, and a specific customer location. You can then view the commission information and drill down to the details of the payment or invoicing document. Before you can view the commission for an open period, collect the commission information by using the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select a salesperson and commission period to view the summary on all customers meeting these criteria. Also, you can specify a customer and one of the customer's locations to view more details.
Element Description
Salesperson ID The salesperson whose commission details you want to view. Leave this field blank to view the commissions for all salespersons.
Commission period The commission period for which you want to display data. Periods are configured in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer A customer associated with the salesperson. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view documents for all customers.
Location The customer location related to the sales, if a customer has been specified.
## The table This table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of document. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, it is a type of invoice document ( invoice or note ). If the commission is calculated on payments, it is one of the payment document types.
Ref. no. The identification number of the document for which the commission is calculated. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Original doc. type If the commission is calculated on payments, this is the type of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, this column is empty.
Original ref. no. The identification number of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Doc. amount The document amount.
Commissionable amount The amount that was used as a base for commission calculation.
Commission (%) The commission percent used for the document.
Commission amount The commission amount earned by the salesperson on the document.
Customer no. The customer to whom the goods or services were sold.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Location The customer location related to the sales.
Location name The name of the customer location.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract items (CT201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract items (CT201000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. Contract items are non-stock items to be provided to a customer under a contract. You define item quantity limits and pricing for item setup, recurring invoicing and renewal. The contract item quantity can be changed within specified limits in a template or in a contract itself. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract item or select an existing item for editing.
Element Description
Contract item The unique identifier of a contract item specified in accordance with the CONTRACTITEM segmented key.
Description A description of the contract item, with any relevant comments.
## The Price options tab This tab provides quantity and price settings for contract items. ### The Price options tab elements
Element Description
Maximum allowed quantity This is the maximum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Minimum allowed quantity This is the minimum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Default quantity This is the contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits for the item in a contract template and a contract based on this template.
Currency ID

The currency of the item price.

You should use contract items priced in the same currency in one template.

Setup price A read-only field that displays contract item price for setup, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays contract item recurring price, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays contract item price for extra usage, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays contract item price for renewal, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
### The Setup and renewal section
Element Description
Setup item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract setup.
Setup pricing

The setup item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the non-stock item base price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Retain rate A percent of deposit original amount. The system displays a warning on a contract screen when deposit balance gets to the percentage point.
Deposit A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract item is treated as a deposit.
Refundable A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is refundable.
Prorate setup A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is invoiced in proportion to unused services in case of contract terms change.
Renewal item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract renewal.
Collect renewal fee on activation A check box that, if selected, indicates that a customer is invoiced for item renewal in the first invoicing period.
Renewal pricing

The renew item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The renew item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
### The Recurring invoicing section
Element Description
Invoice type

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Recurring item The unique identifier of a non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
Reset usage on invoicing A check box that, if selected, indicates that contract item usage is reset after the invoicing for a previous invoicing period has been performed.
Recurring pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. It is applied to service price if customer exceeded service included quantity. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually.
Item price/percent The price for recurring item extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Deposit item The unique identifier of a deposit assigned to the non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
## The Used in contract templates tab The **Used in contract templates** tab contains the list of contract templates the selected contract item is added to.
Column Description
Contract template The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract template.
Description The contract template description.
## The Active contracts tab The **Active contracts** tab contains the list (in a tabular format) of an active contracts the selected item is included to. A contract is considered active if its status is not **Draft**, **Cancelled**, or **Expired**.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status. For details, see: Customer contracts (CT301000).
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when contract expires.
Description The contract description, which includes any related comments.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract templates (CT202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract templates (CT202000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. A contract template defines the settings for all contracts that are based on the template. The following settings are basic for contracts built on this template: renewal and refund policy, duration, currency, invoicing format, and case invoicing settings. Each contract with a customer must be based on a contract template. When you create a new contract by using the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you select the appropriate template, and the system fills in the settings of the template. For details, see: [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract template or select an existing template for editing.
Element Description
Contract template The unique identifier of the contract template, which is specified in accordance with the TMCONTRACT segmented key.
Description

A description of the contract template, with any relevant comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the template is available for selection.
## The Summary tab This tab provides general settings for contracts that are based on this template. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Contract type

The type of contract to be based on this template, which can be one of the following options:

Renewable
The contract expires at the end of its duration and can be renewed during its grace period manually or automatically (if it is scheduled). If you renew such a contract, the system changes the contract expiration date and generates an invoice for a renewal fee, if one applies.
Expiring
The contract expires at the end of its duration. A copy of an expired contract can be created by using the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window or by using the Renew contracts (CT502000) mass processing window. The new contract is created with the Draft status and should be activated.
Unlimited
The contract has no expiration date and can be terminated only.
Duration The duration of the contract, in the specified units. Select the number of units, and select one of the following units in the adjacent field: Year, Quarter, Month, or Custom (days).
Refundable A check box that indicates (if selected) that recurring charges are to be refunded in proportion to unused services, but the setup and renewal fee is to be refunded according to the settings defined for each involved contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.
Refund period The number of days after the contract setup date the customer may claim a refund.
Mass renewal

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window starting on the date that is the number of days before expiration specified in the Renewal point field.

The check box provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Renewal point

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The fields provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Grace period

The period of time (in days) after the contract expiration date when services under a contract are provided and the contract can be renewed according to its type. After the end of the grace period, you cannot renew the contract. If you invoke the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window after the grace period, the system creates a copy of the contract with the Draft status.

The field provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.

Currency The currency to be used for invoicing the customer.
Enable template item override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the list of contract items included in the template can be changed for each contract based on this template.
Automatically release customer documents A check box that indicates (if specified) that the customer documents generated in the process of contract invoicing will be released automatically; otherwise, they will have the Balanced status.
Effective from The date when the template starts to be available for new contracts that you want to base on it.
Discontinue after The date after which the template becomes unavailable for selection when you create a new contract.
### The Invoicing settings section
Element Description
Invoicing period

The invoicing period for the contracts based on the template.

The following options are available: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, and On demand. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice a contract on any date; this option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero.

For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.

Invoice to

The customer account to be billed for a contract.

The following options are available: Parent account, Customer account, and Specific account.

Invoicing schedule starts on

The starting point of the invoicing schedule: Setup date or Activation date.

The contract expiration date is calculated based on this setting.

Invoicing format

The format of an invoice that is issued as a result of contract invoicing. The following options are available:

Summary
Usage for a contract item is summed up and showed as one line with a total quantity and total sum. The expense claims are not summed up and showed individually.
Detail
Each contract item usage occurrence is shown as a separate line.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Case invoicing settings section
Element Description
Case count item

The non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract based on this template.

For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.

## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items that will be provided for contracts based on the template. Contract items are defined in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. You can use this tab to include new contract items or to modify the quantity of each contract item to be included by default for a contract based on the contract template.
Column Description
Item code The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract item.
Description A read-only field that shows the description of the contract item.
Quantity

The quantity of the contract item that is included by default in a contract based on this template.

You can modify this quantity within the allowed limits set for the contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.

If you plan to use the template for creating retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand and add to the template some recurring contract items, we recommend that you specify a quantity of zero.

Setup price A read-only box that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract setup.
Recurring price A read-only field that shows the fee for the included quantity of the item to be invoiced recurrently.
Extra usage price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced as extra usage of the item.
Renewal price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract renewal.
## The Contracts tab The **Contracts** tab lists contracts that have been created in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window based on the selected template. The system adds a row to this table each time you save a newly defined contract based on the template.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract based on this template.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status, which can be Draft, Pending activation, Active, Expired, Cancelled, or Pending upgrade.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Description The description provided for the contract.
## The Attributes tab By using this tab, you can define a list of attributes for the classification of contracts. The attributes you define here are displayed on the **Attributes** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract based on this template. A user can not save a new contract if a value for a required attribute is not specified.
Column Description
Attribute ID The attribute name.
Description The description of the attribute.
Sort order A number representing the position of the attribute in the resulting list of attributes.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available on the Self-service portal.
Control type The type of control (element) used for the attribute. This can be one of the following options: Text, Check box, Combo box, Multi select combo, or Date/time.
Default value The default value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Contract usage (CT303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000 page By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract usage (CT303000) By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also enter usage data, if needed. ## The top part In this area, you select an existing contract to view its usage and invoicing history.
Element Description
Contract ID The contract for which you want to view usage information.
## The Transactions not yet invoiced tab This tab contains various information about the not yet invoiced activities related to the contract.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item to be invoiced.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity A number of units used for the item.
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Case ID The link to the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction. This column is displayed only if the Customer management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Transactions history tab This tab displays information about the items of a contract that were invoiced. You can use the elements in the upper area of the tab to select a particular post period to view only specific usage in the table.
Element Description
Post period The post period for which you want to view invoicing information.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity The used quantity of the item (in the units of measure).
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Type The type of the customer ledger document.
Reference no. The reference number of the invoice. You can click the link to navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so you can view invoice details.
Invoicing date The date when the invoice was issued.
Case ID The ID of the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Customer classes (AR201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000 page In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer classes (AR201000) In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. These classes make it easier to create customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window: Once you select a class for a customer you are entering, the system inserts the settings you have defined for the class, such as default accounts and subaccounts, into the corresponding window elements. (You can override these values, if needed.) To ease the creation of customer classes, specify an existing customer class as the default one in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you do this, when you create a new customer class, its elements will be populated with values from the default customer class. (You can overwrite any of these values.) For more information about customer classes, see: [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Apply restriction settings to all customers Updates the security settings for all customers of the class. If you have changed the default restriction group for the selected customer class (on the General settings tab of this window, Default general settings section), clicking this action will include all customers of the class in the specified group and exclude them from the group previously specified as the default one.
## The top part In this area, you can select a class by its identifier and view its information, or you can specify the summary information for a class you are creating.
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the class. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description

A detailed description of the customer class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The General information tab This tab is used to store general settings for the customer class. You can specify as few or as many default settings as you'd like. > [!NOTE] > Changes to class settings will not affect existing records of customers of the class; however, when you create a customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and fill in the **Customer class** field, the new customer gets the most up-to-date class settings. ### The Default general settings section
Element Description
Country The country of customers of the class.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for customers of the class.
Require VAT zone A check box that means (if selected) that the VAT zone value is required for customers of the class. If the check box is cleared, the VAT zone is optional for these customers.
Default location ID from branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the identifier of the branch the user is currently signed in to is used by default as the identifier of the customer’s main location instead of theMAIN (default).

This field is available only when the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Default restriction group The restriction group to which newly created customers of the class are assigned by default. To assign existing customers of the class to the default group, click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers in the toolbar.
Salesperson ID The salesperson to make sales to customers of the class.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer class.

See also: About export types.

Document language The language of the documents to be printed to the customers of the class.
Currency ID The default currency, by its ID, that is used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the currency may be overridden in operations with customers of the class; that is, you can select a currency other than the default currency for individual documents.
Currency rate type The default currency rate type used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable rate override A check box that means (if selected) that users may override the currency rate type in operations with customers of the class, selecting a currency rate type other than the default one for individual documents
Group/document discount limit (%)

The maximum percentage of group-level and document-level discounts allowed per document for customers of this class.

This value will be used for validation of discounts in sales orders and invoices. If for an order or invoice, the percentage of the total discount exceeds the specified limit, the system will display a warning on the Discount detailstab of the appropriate window. The percentage of the total discount for a document is calculated as follows: the total of the Discount amt. column (on theDiscount details tab) divided by the value of the Detail total field in the top part of the appropriate window.

Price class ID The identifier of the price class.
### The Default delivery settings section
Element Description
Ship via The carrier whose service will be used by default for customers of the class.
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be assigned by default to customers of the class.
Shipping rule

The way shipments for orders should be created by default for a customer of this class. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
The shipment can be created only if all the goods on the order are available for shipping.
Back orders allowed
If the quantity of the goods is not sufficient for order fulfillment, or some of the line items are not currently available, a back order should be created.
Cancel remainder
The shipment is created for any quantity of the items, and the remainder on the order is cancelled.
Warning when missing VAT registration ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when VAT registration ID is missing on the item.
Warning when missing corporate ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when corporate ID is missing on the order.
### The Default credit verification settings section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit verification rule for customers of the class. The following options are available:

Days past due
Defines the credit period as a certain number of days past the due date of the invoice. The number of days is specified as the Credit days past due in this section.
Credit limit
Does not allow the customer to exceed the credit limit amount (the Credit limit in this section).
Limit and days past due
Causes both rules to be applied: The customer’s debt should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than Credit days past due specifies.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with customers of the class.
Credit limit The credit limit amount for customers of the class if the Credit limit or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Amount over limit The maximum amount allowed over the credit limit for customers of the class.
Credit days past due The duration of the credit period. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
### The Default financial and payment settings section
Element Description
Terms The default payment terms of the customer class; terms are defined in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for customers of this class.
Payment method The payment method used by default in relations with these customers.
Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment application may be performed automatically for customers of the class.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that overdue charges can be applied to these customers.

This check box is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Overdue charge ID

The overdue charge to be applied for customers of this class.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality has been enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed for customers of this class.
Write-off limit

The maximum value that may be written off for customers of the class. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.

This field is available only if the Enable write-offs check box is selected.

Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customer classes (AR201000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Default customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification The check box you select to enable Webhook notifications for the customer class.
### The Default print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send invoices by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Print dunning letters

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters can be printed for sending to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Send dunning letters by email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters canbe sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Print statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be printed for sending to customers of the class in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Send statements by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Multi-currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements will be printed or sent by email in multi-currency format for customers of the class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with customers of the class:

Open item
A statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Customers (AR303000) window from the Document language field. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.

Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.

Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When this check box is selected, the first attachment marked to be sent to AutoInvoice will be the visible invoice for the receiver. This only applies if an attachment exists on the invoice, else the pure XML will be used to generate a readable version of the invoice for the receiver.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.

## The General ledger accounts tab This tab holds the default general ledger accounts and corresponding subaccounts of customers of the class.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the customers of this class.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount for the asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to customers of this class.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - non-taxable account The non-taxable sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - EU account The EU sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - export account The export sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record sales made to customers of the class.
Discount account

The expense account used to record trade discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount sub.

The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Prepayment account The account to record prepayments received from customers of the class.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Freight sub. The subaccount used with the income account to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Unrealised gain account

The account to record unrealised gains calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.

Unrealised gain sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised gains on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

Unrealised loss account

The account to record unrealised losses calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.

Unrealised loss sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised losses on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, the subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes associated with the class. You can select an attribute from the list of attributes defined in your system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Element Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its identifier. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description A detailed description of the attribute. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute for sorting in reports.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for all customers of the class.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available for portal users.
Control type The type of control for the attribute: Text, Combo, Multi select combo, Lookup, Check field, or Date/time.
Default value The default value of the attribute.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers of the class. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents(by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers of the class. The mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailings configured for particular customers. You can select mailings for the customer class from the list of predefined mailings available in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window (if the Inventory module is enabled in the system). The **Mailing settings** tab provides default values for mailings to be configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be generated and sent to customer contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing on appropriate processing forms. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters in any of the available formats. The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, with the list of recipients. In the **Recipients** table, you can specify default types of customer contacts, not particular contacts. Only employees of your company can be specified as email recipients at the customer class level. ### The Mailings table By using this table you can view and modify the list of mailings to be available by default for customers of the class. The settings here are used as follows: + To provide default values for mailing settings for customers of the class, + To specify the mailings to be used to inform employees of your company, if needed, about changes in the documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of this mailing.
Branch The branch for which this mailing is defined.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing to customers of the class. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report to be used by default as the email body for the mailing, if this mailing uses a report rather than a mailing template.
Notification template The email template to be used for generating personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used. For each mailing, you can specify either a report or an email template. By default, a notification template specified in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is inserted in this column (if any).
Format The format in which the report, if a report is used, will be sent by default if a recipient has no preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be sent for only active mailings.
### The Recipients table Use the **Recipients** table to view and modify the list of default recipients for mailings. This list is used primarily to provide default contact types for the customer class; if necessary, you can also specify an employee of your company to receive electronic copies of documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive the mailing:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your company who handles the documents of customers of the class or is otherwise associated with the customers
Contact ID

The particular recipient of the selected type.

A recipient can be specified only if Employee has been specified in the Contact type column. This employee will by default receive emails with documents of all customers of the class.

Format The format in which the document (formatted according to the selected report if applicable) will be sent for recipients of this type by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients will receive emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contacts of this type will by default receive blind carbon copies (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer contracts (CT301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000 page By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer contracts (CT301000) By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. When you are creating a new contract, you can select the contract template you want to base it on. For more details, see [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Set up contract
Initiates contract setup. You can modify the contract setup date in the Set up contract dialog box that opens. By default, the contract setup date is the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of this window (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Pending activation status and an invoice is generated for the contract items that have a setup price specified.
Activate contract
Initiates the provision of contract services. You can modify the contract activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, the activation date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Active status and an invoice is generated for contract items that have a prepaid recurring price specified. (The recurring price is invoiced in proportion to the services to be used.)
Set up and activate contract
Initiates contract setup and service provision on the same date. You can modify the contract setup and activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, this date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section).
Run contract invoicing
Initiates the invoicing process for the contract according to the invoicing schedule. After the operation has completed, you can view and further process the generated invoice on the Customer ledger history tab of the current window.
Renew contract
Initiates contract renewal according to the type of the contract. For details, see: About contract renewal.
Terminate contract
Cancels the contract (the contract status is changed to Cancelled ); no services will be provided.
Upgrade contract
Initiates the contract upgrade. The contract is given the Pending upgrade status and contract details can be edited. If you run contract invoicing for such contracts, it is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Activate upgrade
Initiates the provision of contract services according to the new settings that you have specified when the contract status was Pending upgrade. For details, see: Make changes to contract services.
Undo last action
Cancels the last action performed on this contract. This menu command is unavailable when the contract has the Draft status and when the last action involved released documents. After an action is undone, the Undo last action command becomes available again after another action is performed on a contract. The list of actions performed is available on the Contract history tab of this window.
Change ID
Brings up the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can type the new contract identifier.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for quick access to an inquiry window:

Contract usage
Navigates to the Contract usage (CT303000) window so you can view the usage of the contract.
### The Set up contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Set up contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract setup.
Element Description
Setup date

The date of contract setup.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of the contract.

OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### The Activate contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Activate contract** or **Set up and activate contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract activation.
Element Description
Activation date

The date of contract activation.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab of the contract.

OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### Specify new ID This dialog box opens when you select the **Change ID** action. By using the dialog box, you can modify the identifier of the contract.
Element Description
Contract ID The new contract identifier.
OK (button) Changes the contract identifier to the new one.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new contract based on a specific template or to select an existing contract for editing.
Element Description
Contract ID The unique identifier of a contract, which is specified in accordance with the configuration of the CONTRACT segmented key. The CONTRACT segmented key inherits its structure from the PROJECT segmented key.
Contract template The contract template that is used as a base for the contract.
Status

The status of the contract, which is one of the following:

Draft
The contract has not been activated and cannot yet be used.
Pending activation
The contract is set up and needs to be activated so that you can start providing services and initiate recurring invoicing (if required).
Active
The contract is activated and should be used as the basis for invoicing.
Expired
The contract has expired and can be renewed within the grace period.
Cancelled
The contract has been cancelled and is no longer used.
Pending upgrade
The contract is being prepared for upgrade and can be edited and invoiced. Contract invoicing is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Location The customer location associated with the contract.
Description

The description of the contract, which includes any related comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Balance A read-only field that displays the sum of the balances of open invoices associated with the contract.
## The Summary tab You use this tab to configure the general settings of a new contract or to view the settings of an existing contract. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Setup date The contract setup date. For contracts with the Draft status, in this field, you select the setup date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Set up contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Set up contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been set up.
Activation date The contract activation date. For contracts with the Draft or Pending activation status, you use this field to select the date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Activate contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been activated.
Expiration date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract will expire. The date is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule.
Termination date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract was cancelled, if applicable.
Grace period (in days) The period of time after the expiration date when the renewable contract can be renewed. After the end of the grace period, only a copy of this contract with the Draft status can be created when you click the Renew contract action (that is, you cannot renew the same contract).
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that this contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Renewal point x Days before expiration

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The accepted maximum value in the field is 3650 days (10 years).

Currency A read-only field that displays the currency to be used for contract invoicing.
### The Invoicing schedule section
Element Description
Invoicing schedule starts on A read-only field that displays the start date of the first invoicing period. The date, which is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule, is displayed after contract activation.
Invoicing period

The type of invoicing schedule, which can be one of the following options: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, or On demand.

The invoice date is calculated based on the selected option and the date when the invoicing schedule is started. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice the contract on any date.

The option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero. For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.

Last invoicing date A read-only field that shows the date when the invoicing was performed most recently.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing invoice, according to the invoicing schedule.
### The Invoice information section
Element Description
Invoice to

The setting that defines the customer account to be invoiced for a contract. The following options are available:

Parent account
The account to be invoiced is the parent account of the customer account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Customer account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Specific account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Account field of the current section of the Summary tab.
Account The specific account that is to be invoiced for contract services. This field is available only if the Specific account option is selected in the Invoice to field.
Location The customer location associated with the account the contract is invoiced to.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Contract management section
Element Description
Owner The owner of the contract.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the contract.
Case count item A non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract. For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.
## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items provided under the contract. The list of contract items is loaded automatically from the template you have selected. You can modify the list of items if the **Enable template item override** check box is selected for the template in the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window.
Element Description
Effective from The date when the contract was set up or upgraded. This field is available for editing when the contract has the Pending upgrade status. You may select a date here that is to be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box, which opens when you click the Activate upgrade action.
Promo code The code of the discount to be applied.
Pending setup

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of setup fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (the item setup price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending recurring

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of recurring fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (item recurring price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending upgrade status.
Total pending A read-only field that displays the total pending amount. This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending Upgrade status.
Current setup A read-only field that displays the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current recurring A read-only field that displays the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with the sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Included The contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits. For recurring contract items, if any are added to retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand, we recommend that you specify an included quantity of zero.
Difference The quantity difference if the contract status is Pending upgrade.
Setup price The contract item price for setup.
Setup discount (%) The discount percent applied to the setup price.
Recurring price The contract item recurring price.
Extra usage price The contract item price for extra usage.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Renewal price The contract item price for renewal.
Renewal discount (%) The discount percent applied to the renewal price.
## The Recurring summary tab This tab lists the contract items that have a recurring price configured.
Element Description
Recurring total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Extra usage total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for extra usage for the current invoicing period.
Total due A read-only field that displays the total amount to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Item ID The identifier of the non-stock item the customer is invoiced for recurrently.
UoM The unit of measure used for invoicing. The UoM is the contract currency for deposit contract items.
Invoice type The item invoicing policy defined in the contract item. The invoicing type is Deposit for deposit contract items.
Included The item quantity the customer is invoiced for at the recurring price.
Recurring price The recurring price of the item.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Extra usage price The price of extra usage of the item.
Not yet invoiced The item quantity for which the customer is to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Used total The item quantity used from contract activation until the current business date.
## The Employee overrides tab The tab displays a list of the associations between the earning type, the labour item, and the employee. An association is used to determine the labour item to be used as the source of the price and sales accounts for recording contract usage if this labour item is not explicitly defined in the case class for the earning type specified in the released activity. For details, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/).
Column Description
Type of hour The identifier of the type of hour.
Description The description of the type of hour.
Labour item The identifier of the non-stock item (of the Labour type) used as a source of the price and sales account to record the contract usage.
Employee The identifier of the employee. If the employee is not selected, the value is All employees.
Employee name The name of the employee.
## The Contract history tab
Button Description
View contract Opens a new window with the Customer contracts (CT301000) window so you can view the related contract details.
### Table columns
Column Description
Action The action performed for the contract.
Date The date when the action was performed.
User The user who performed the action.
Related contract The ID of any related contract. The related contract is either derived from the current contract or served as a derivation for the current contract. The field is populated by the system during the renewal process. For details, see: Renew a contract.
## The Sales history tab The tab displays the list of documents related to the contract.
Column Description
Type The type of customer ledger document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the document. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view the details of the document.
Post period The financial period to which the invoice transactions are posted.
Date The date of the invoice.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Status The status of the invoice.
Amount The amount of the invoice.
Balance The balance of the invoice if it was paid partially.
Payment method The customer default payment method.
## The Attributes tab The list of attributes defined in the selected template. You can use available attributes for classification of contracts.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Value The value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer details (AR402000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000 page You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer details (AR402000) You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can select the branch, customer, financial period, currency, and customer ledger account–subaccount pair used for the customer; you then view the list of documents associated with the customer. By default the window displays the list of open customer documents for the selected customer (with the **Open** status), but you can add to the list closed documents and unreleased documents by selecting the **Show all documents** and **Include unreleased documents** check boxes correspondingly. You can also print other reports based on this information, which are listed under **Reports** in the upper part of the window. > [!NOTE] > Cash sales transactions are shown as split into **Cash sale** and **Cash sale invoice** transactions. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Enter new invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, so that you can enter a new invoice for the customer.
Enter new payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the customer.
Pay invoice
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the selected invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report.
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500) report.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) report.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a financial period, a customer, and the currency of the operations. Also, you can select a particular customer ledger account with the corresponding subaccount.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Customer The customer whose open documents you want to view. Obligatory.
Period The financial period for which you want to view the data. If you make no selection, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Currency The currency used with the specified customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for the customer.
Customer ledger sub The corresponding subaccount.
Show all documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that closed documents (with the Closed status) are included in the list. The check box is not displayed if a financial period is selected in the Period field.
Include unreleased documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that unreleased documents (with the On hold and Balanced statuses) are included in the list.
Balance by documents A read-only field that displays the total balance recalculated for all customer’s documents matching the selected criteria. The balance will not change based on whether the Open documents only option is selected because Closed documents do not affect the balance.
Current balance A read-only field that displays the customer balance retrieved from the account history records in the database.
Prepayments balance The balance of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Balance discrepancy

A read-only field that displays the difference between the Balance by documents value and the sum of Current balance and

Prepayment balance values. If unreleased documents are not included, the value should be equal to zero; if it’s not zero, there are errors in the database.

Include child accounts

A check box that you select to view documents of both the parent account and its child accounts. The Balance by documents, Current balance, Prepayment balance, and Balance discrepancy fields (in the top part of the window) will display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected on the Invoicing settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## The table The table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part. The amounts or balances on customer payments are shown as negative values.
Column Description
Customer The customer number.
Branch The branch ID.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Reference no. The identifier of the document as it was assigned by the number series.
Post period The period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Date The date when the document was created.
Due date The due date of the document.
Status The status of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Original amount (currency) The amount in the currency of the document (before discount).
Balance (currency) The balance of the document in the specified currency.
Cash discount taken (currency) The cash discount taken in the specified currency.
Orig. amount The original amount of the document, before payment application, in the base currency.
Balance The balance of the document, if a payment was applied, in the base currency.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount received by the customer on the document.
RGOL amount The total amount of realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred as the result of currency rate fluctuation.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer for the document.
Sales invoice no./payment no. The reference number of the original customer document.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Period beg. balance The balance of the account at the beginning of the selected financial period.
Period beg. balance in currency The account balance in the specified currency at the start of the selected financial period.

Related pages

Concepts

Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000 section You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Settings defined in this window include number series for customer ledger documents, document and payment processing options, and mailing settings. Some settings in this window cannot be changed once the workspace is in use, such as the number series assigned for invoices, debit andcredit notes, and customer payments. Other settings can be changed at will. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The General information tab The general settings for the Customer ledger workspace include the number series used for customer documents and for financial charges. Also, you can set various document processing options. > [!NOTE] > You can use different number series for each document type or the same series for multiple types. In the latter case, the system assigns all documents numbers (identifiers) from the same series, based on the order they were entered or generated, so two successive identifiers may refer to documents of different types. ### The Number series section
Element Description
General ledger batch number series The number series used for batches originating in the Customer ledger workspace.
Invoice number series The number series used for customer ledger invoices. A customer ledger invoice is created for each original customer document, invoice, note, or financial charge.
Payment number series The number series used for customer payments.
Debit note number series The number series used for debit adjustments.
Credit note number series The number series used for credit adjustments.
Write-off number series The number series used for write-off documents.
Overdue charge number series The number series used for overdue charges. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Price worksheet number series The number series used for price worksheets.
Dunning fee number series The number series used for dunning fees.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically post on release A check box that indicates (if selected) that transactions will be automatically posted to the General ledger workspace once they are released in the Customer ledger workspace.
Post summary when updating the general ledger

A check box that indicates (if selected) that customer ledger documents will be posted to the General ledger workspace with summarised row amounts if particular criteria are met. That is, if multiple rows in a customer ledger document specify the same account (and subaccount, if any) and branch (if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), then in the general ledger batch, these rows will be combined into one row with the summarised amount. Note: The summarised transaction amounts can be posted to an account (and subaccount, if any) only if both the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected in this window and the Summary option is specified for an account in the Post option column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

Note

The general ledger batch can contain multiple documents if the Consolidated posting to general ledger functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see Overview of the functionalities.

Activate migration mode

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user can release documents in Customer ledger and Supplier ledger (both invoices and payments) without creating a General ledger batch in the General ledger.The balance will still be added to the customer or supplier.

Stock items can also be selected.

The Sales and Purchases workspaces cannot be used.

### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Default customer class ID The customer class to be used as the default class. When you create a new class by using the Customer classes (AR201000) window, the settings defined for the class specified here will be inserted. (You can change any of these settings.)
Combine sales sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the sales subaccount to be used in data entry windows in the Customer ledger workspace. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

C
Subaccount associated with the branch
E
Subaccount associated with the employee
I
Subaccount associated with the item
L
Subaccount associated with the customer location
S
Subaccount associated with the salesperson

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times there are characters in the segment. See: About combined subaccounts for more information.

Rounding rule for invoices

The rule to be used for invoice total amount rounding, which is one of the following:

Use currency precision
To round the amounts to the precision supported for the currency of the document
Nearest
To round each invoice total to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit (specified in the Rounding precision field)
Up
To round up each invoice total to the next multiple of the smallest unit
Down
To round down each invoice total to the previous multiple of the smallest unit

This field is available only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Rounding precision

The smallest unit for invoice amount rounding; this list is not available if the Use currency precision option is selected in the Rounding rule field. Select one of the following options:

0.05
To round each total to a multiple of 0.05
0.10
To round each total to a multiple of 0.1
0.50
To round each total to a multiple of 0.5
1.00
To round each total to a multiple of 1
10.00
To round each total to a multiple of 10
100.00
To round each total to a multiple of 100

This field is available only if the Invoice roundingfunctionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Hold documents on entry A check box that means (if selected) that documents will get the On hold status by default when they are saved.
Validate document totals on entry A check box that means (if selected) that totals of new documents will be validated on entry.
Require payment reference on entry A check box that means (if selected) that users must fill in the Payment ref. field in data entry windows in the Customer ledger, Cash management, and Sales workspaces.
Hold document on failed credit check A check box that indicates (if selected) that new invoices and notes are placed on hold and cannot be released for customers that failed the credit check. If the check box is not selected, new documents can be saved and processed regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that failed their credit check.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Automatic payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Process customer refunds (AR50300S) window.
Manual payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Manual payments (AR30200S) window.
Direct debit payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S) window.
### The Data processing settings section
Element Description
Age credits A check box that means (if selected) that credit notes and open payments will be aged on customer statements and reports along with invoices and debit notes according to the ageing periods defined in the Statement cycles (AR202800) window. If the check box is cleared, credit notes and open payments will appear as the current documents.
Set default overdue charges by statement cycle A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges specified for the statement cycle are applied to an overdue document. If the check box is not selected, overdue charges specified for the customer class are applied. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Calculate on overdue charge documents A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges will be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices; thus, the amount of overdue charges compounds. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Apply payments to overdue charges first A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments will be applied to overdue charges first and only after that to outstanding invoices, starting with those having the earliest dates, if the Apply payments automatically check box is selected for a customer in the Customers (AR303000) window. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Salesperson commission settings section
Element Description
Salesperson commission by

The way commissions for all salespersons are calculated:

Invoice
On the invoices associated with a salesperson, whether the invoices are paid or not
Payment
On only the paid invoices
Commission period type The way commission is paid: Monthly, Quarterly, Yearly, or By financial period.
### The Consolidation settings section
Element Description
Consolidate statements for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements from different branches should be consolidated.
Statement from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated statements.
Consolidate dunning letters for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters from different branches should be consolidated.
Dunning letter from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated dunning letters.
### The Default write-off reason codes section
Element Description
Reason code balance write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a balance write-off operation.
Reason code credit write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a credit write-off operation.
### The VAT recalculation settings section This section is available only if the VAT reporting feature is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Automatically release credit notes A check box that indicates (if selected) that VAT credit notes generated for the invoices that are fully paid within the cash discount period will be released automatically when you process them in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window.
Credit note description

The description to be used for the credit note, which is generated for a document that was paid early and that adjusts the VAT and taxable amounts.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

### The Customer refund settings section
Element Description
Payment message prefix The prefix that will be used in outgoing payment messages.
## The Price/discount settings tab By using this tab, you can select options that affect price calculation, price history retention, and discount application. ### The Price maintenance section
Element Description
Default rate type The default rate type to be used for calculation of prices in foreign currencies. The field provides a rate type to be used by default when you work with sales prices.
Always calculate the price from the base currency

A check box that indicates (if selected) that if a document uses a non-base currency, then the item price (sales or default) is converted to a price in the currency of the document, based on the item price expressed in the base currency. Thus, when you add an item to a document (an order or invoice) that uses a non-base currency, the system suggests the price of the item based the value of this check box:

Cleared
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the document currency, and if a sales price is found, the system suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests the converted default price.
Selected
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the base currency, and if the sales price is found, the system converts this price to the document currency and suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests it.
Load sales prices by alternative item ID A check box that (if selected) makes it possible to specify prices in sales price worksheets by the alternative IDs of items, so that the system will find and populate the corresponding item IDs automatically.
### The Price retention section
Element Description
Retention type

The way the history of prices, which is defined by using the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, will be retained. Select one of the following options:

Last price
The last defined price is kept.
Fixed number of months
The history of price changes is kept for the number of months specified in the Number of months field. The period is calculated back from the effective date of a worksheet that contains respective price record.
Note

By default, Retention type is set to Fixed number of months and Number of months is set to 0, which means that the history of prices will be kept forever.

Number of months The number of months the history of price changes should be kept. This field is available if the Fixed number of months option is selected in the Retention type field.
### The Discounts section This section is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Line discount basis

The way the line discount will be applied. Select one of the following options:

Manual amount
The discount will be applied to the line amount.
Unit price
The discount will be applied to the item’s unit price.
Apply quantity discounts to

The way the system applies the discounts defined by quantity. Select one of the following options:

The UoM on the document line
The system applies the discount to the quantity in the document line’s unit of measure (UoM).
The base UoM
The system converts the quantity in the document line’s UoM to the quantity in the base UoM and applies discounts based on the calculated base quantity.
Apply line discounts specific to A check box that indicates (if selected) that any line-level discounts should be skipped if there is a special price for the line item that is defined for this particular customer.
## The Dunning settings tab By using the **Dunning settings** tab, you can define how the system prepares dunning letters: by grouping overdue documents by customer account; or by grouping overdue documents by customer and by the dunning level of a document. The amount of the dunning letter fee (and which accounts are used for recording this fee), and what intervals are used for sending dunning letters. This tab is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### The Dunning process settings section In this section, you define how the documents are grouped when the system prepares dunning letters and which documents you want to prepare letters for.
Element Description
Dunning process

The way the system groups overdue documents when prepares dunning letters. Select one of the following options:

By customer
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer account. With this option selected, the system selects the Automatically release dunning letters check box and sets it as read-only.
By document
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level.
Note

We recommend that you select the way of setting a level from the very beginning and keep that setting. You can switch from By customer to By document, but switching from By document to By customer is not recommended.

Automatically release dunning letters A check box that indicates, if selected, that dunning letters are automatically released after preparation is completed. The field is available for editing if the By document option was selected in the Dunning process field.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system includes in dunning letters the unpaid documents that are not due yet. This is the default value for the Include other unpaid documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.
Include credit note documents

A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.

This is the default value for the Include credit note documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.

### The Dunning fee settings section In this section, you define the accounts to which you want to record the dunning letters fee, if your company charges one.
Element Description
Dunning fee item The non-stock item that provides an account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a VAT category.
Automatically release dunning fee documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that an invoice for the dunning fee is automatically released when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Otherwise, you need to release it manually by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
### The table columns
Element Description
Dunning letter level An integer that indicates the order in which a letter of this level should be sent.
Days past due The number of days that should pass after the due date for at least one customer document before the system may generate a dunning letter of this level.
Days to settle The number of days that are added to the letter date to calculate the deadline for the payment.
Description Any comment that is relevant to a dunning letter of this level.
Dunning fee The amount of the dunning letter fee, if your company charges one, for this level.
Days to due The number of days to the due date.
Report text code The code of the report text that will be included in the dunning letter.
## The Reporting settings tab The **Reporting settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers. Mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailing settings of customer classes, which in turn will provide default values for mailings configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be sent to customer contacts and company employees when an employee (a user) performs specific processing. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters. Also, customers can be notified about credit card expiration. The tab includes the **Default sources** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Default recipients** table, with the list of recipients. ### The Default sources table You use the **Default source** table to view the list of predefined mailings and select any of them for use in the Customer ledger workspace. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique ID of the mailing. The mailings available in the Customer ledger workspace are listed below:

INVOICE
To send invoices by email
DUNNINGLETTER
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances.
STATEMENT
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in the base currency)
STATEMENTMC
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in multi-currency format)
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report that, by default, will be used to structure the information available in the document. The document will be sent as an attachment. A notification template, if selected next, is used to window an email body, otherwise an email body is taken from the report settings.
Notification template

The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is selected for this mailing.

Note

You need to specify either a notification template or a report for a mailing at least. If a notification template is not specified, text for email body is taken from the report settings.

The system inserts this template by default in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab in the Customer classes (AR201000) window when you add a mailing in the Mailings table.

Format The format in which the document (if a report is used) will be sent by default if no other preferences are specified in the Customers (AR303000) window for the particular customer contacts. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table By using the **Default recipients** table, you can view and modify default types of recipients for the mailing selected in the**Default sources** table. Contact types specified here are used as default values for the contact types of customer classes.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive mailings. You select one of the following options:

Primary
A primary contact of the customer
Remittance
A remittance contact of the customer
Shipping
A shipping contact of the customer
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of specific customer classes or specific customers, or is otherwise associated with the classes or customers
Contact ID The ID of the mailing recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee as the contact type. This employee, if one is selected, will receive emails about changes in the documents of all customers.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact (or contact of this type) will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.
## The Payment settings tab On this tab, you can create new payment configurations. ### The top part
Element Description
Select configuration Click icon-select and double-click to select your preferred CID configuration.
Status The status of the configuration. To hide/view CID code on outgoing invoices, set the status to Inactive/Active accordingly. The Editing status allows you to edit the predefined format of the CID.
Branch The branch in which the configuration is applied. If you have multiple branches, you can add different settings for each branch.
Payment method The payment method to which you want your configuration to apply.
Digit counter The number of digits to be used in the payment references with this configuration.
Description The name for the new configuration.
Display mask The display mask to be used to control the format of dates and numeric values.
Reference modulus The modulus for the new configuration.
Reference weight The weight or relevance of the modulus.
Amount check digit The digit that is used for checking of amount.
Amount weight The weight or relevance of the amount.
### The table columns
Element Description
Element Choose the elements that will make up the new configuration.
Fixed value A fixed value in the element, if any.
Number of positions The number of digits the element should have.
Leading/trailing zeros The value that shows if leading/trailing zeros will be used in the elements or now.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab For more information about the settings to be defined here for the use of AutoInvoice, see [Settings in Customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-customer-ledger-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer list (AR40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer list (AR40101S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the selected customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display the customer accounts.
Status

The status of the customer accounts you want to display. You can select one of the following options:

Active
accounts that are in use.
On hold
accounts that are not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
accounts for which no invoices may be entered, because some payments have not been received.
Inactive
accounts that are set to Inactive.
One time
accounts marked as one-time customers.
Country The customer’s country.
AutoInvoice validation (B2B) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
AutoInvoice validation (B2C) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is displayed in the system.
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
Attention The customer’s main contact attention line.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Last sale The date when the last sale has been made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer. Accordant with the status selected in the top part of the window.
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Accordant with the customer class selected in the top part of the window.
Address 2 The second line of the customer’s address.
Address 3 The third line of the customer’s address.
County The customer’s county or province.
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract, if applicable.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator, if applicable.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Print dunning letters A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters for the customer can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices for the customer can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send dunning letters by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters for the customer by email in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice as a banking e-invoice. This applies to Norway only.
Send statements by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements for the customer can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Terms The ID of the payment terms used in operations with the customer.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices for the customer by email in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
VAT zone The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

Related pages

Tasks

Customer locations (CR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010 page In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer locations (CR303010) In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can select a customer and create a new location for it, or select an existing location for editing.
Element Description
Business connection The customer this location is associated with.
Location ID

The identifier of the location; an alphanumeric string of up to six characters may be used.

The system automatically assigns the identifier (MAIN) to the first location associated with the customer. For each additional location, you can specify the identifier.

Active

A check box that you select if the location is active.

For auditing purposes, locations cannot be removed. If the location is not used, mark it as inactive by clearing the check box.

Location name

A descriptive name to help users recognise the location.

You can enter an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.

## The General information tab On this tab, you can specify the location's contact and address information. The tab has elements organised in sections to make it easier to find information. ### The Location contact section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the contact information is the same as the company’s main information.

If this check box is selected, the elements below it are populated with this information.

Company name This location’s legal business name.
Attention Information about the contact person.
Email The location’s default email address.
Web The website address (if any) related to the location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The default fax number of the location.
### The Location address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the location address is the same as the customer’s main address.

The system then populates the elements below with this address.

Address 1 The first line of the address of this location.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Postcode The location’s postal code.
City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the location.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
VAT registration ID The optional VAT registration ID associated with the location. An input mask or regular expression can be set to validate this value.
Corporate ID The organisation number to be used for the customer location.
VAT zone The VAT zone associated with the location.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer location.

See also: About export types.

VAT exemption number If this location is VAT exempt, the exemption number.
EDI code The EDI code to be used for the customer location.
GLN The GLN to be used for the customer location.
Shipping branch The location of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer location.
Price class The price class that is associated with the customer location. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the location.
Default project The project associated with this location by default, or a non-project code indicating that no projects are associated by default.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the location.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ship via The carrier used for shipping the goods to the customer location.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used in relations with the location.
Shipping zone The shipping zone used to calculate the freight charge when your company ships goods to the location.
FOB point The location at which title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer location.
Residential delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment will be delivered to a residential area.
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance A check box that indicates (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The option that defines how the orders should be fulfilled for this customer location. You can use one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
back orders are allowed if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
the ordered quantity can be shipped partially, and the quantity remaining after the first shipment will be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this location. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days required for shipped goods to reach the location.
Calendar The calendar associated with the location. Calendar settings are defined in the Work calendar (CS209000) window.
### The Excise duty section This tab section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Check box Description
Exclude from duty calculation

A check box that you select if you want the location to be excluded from excise duty calculations. Orders and invoices with items connected to excise duties will display excise duty amounts and totals, but these will always be 0.

Released invoices with excise duty items are traceable in the Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000) window.

## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can specify the general ledger accounts associated with the location.
Element Description
Same as default location A check box that indicates (if selected) that the accounts to be used for this location are those specified for the default customer location.
Customer ledger account The asset account used to record the account balance for this location.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Sales account The account used to record sales to this location; you must specify this account.
Sales - non-taxable account The account used to record non-taxable sales to this location.
Sales - EU account The account used to record the EU sales to this location.
Sales - export account The account used to record the export sales to this location.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount; you must specify a subaccount.
Discount account The expense account to record the discount received by the customer location.
Discount sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The account to record freight charges for sales orders.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab Fields to be used when sending electronic invoices in PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format. ### The PEPPOL scheme section
Element Description
Endpoint

Seller electronic address identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the seller electronic address.

Example value: 0088

Party identification

Buyer identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Buyer identifier.

Example value: 0088

Party legal

Seller legal registration identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Seller legal registration identifier.

Example value: 0007

### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref.

Invoice line buyer accounting reference. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the buyer’s financial accounts.

Example value: 4217:2323:2323

Originator document ref.

Tender or lot reference. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.

Example value: PPID-123

Contract document ref.

Contract reference. The identification of a contract.

Example value: 123Contractref

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer payment methods (AR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010 page You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payment methods (AR303010) You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. You may assign each customer any number of payment methods and, for payment methods that can involve multiple sets of details, any number of these detail sets. ## The top part In this area of the window, you can specify the customer for which you want to add a customer payment method and the payment method that will be used as a template. The layout of this area and of the **Payment method details** tab depends on the settings of the selected payment method.
Element Description
Customer The customer whose payment method you want to view or add; select a customer from the list of customers defined in the system.
Payment method The payment method used as a template for a customer payment method you are currently viewing; select a payment method to use its settings for creating a new customer payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected customer payment method is active (that is, available for recording payments).
Cash account

The cash account to accrue customer payments made by this payment method, if it differs from the default cash account specified for the payment method selected. You can select an account from the list of cash accounts allowed for the payment method.

If the field is empty, the system will use the default cash account of the selected payment method.

Description The description of the selected payment method.
## The Payment method details tab The specific elements on this tab depend on the selected payment method, which is defined in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Column Description
Description A description of the column. Depending on the selected payment method you will see different descriptions here.
Value Enter the value, for example a bank account number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer payments (AR302000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000 page You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payments (AR302000) You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. Also, you can add charges applied by the bank for payment processing, and release a payment document. If the payment document still has a non-zero balance after it has been applied to customer invoices and notes, you can apply its balance against additional invoices or notes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Match a credit note with an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-a-credit-note-with-an-invoice/) + [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) + [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/) + [Create a payment for a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-payment-for-a-sales-invoice/) + [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/) + [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/) + [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/) + [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/) + [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) + [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/) + [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/) + [Void a customer refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-customer-refund/) + [Match customer documents in Customer ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-customer-documents-in-customer-ledger/) + [Create a voided payment](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-voided-payment/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the payment, automatically creating a batch of appropriate transactions.
Void The system creates the document of the Voided refund type with a negative amount. For the voided refund, you can specify the application date, period, and description, and then release the voided refund.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details and Customer documents menu command, which you can click for quick access to the respective windows.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
## The top part Here, you can enter a new payment or select one of the existing documents for viewing its details or for editing.
Element Description
Type

The type of a document. The following types are available:

Payment
A document recording a payment received from the customer. One payment may be applied to multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Credit note
A document crediting the customer, which may be used as a base for a customer refund or applied against invoices and debit notes.
Prepayment
A document recording a customer prepayment. One prepayment may be applied to one or multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Customer refund
A payment, designed to reimburse the customer, that can be applied to credit notes.
Voided payment
A payment that was voided.
Voided refund
A refund that was voided.
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that won’t be paid.
Ref. no

The unique identifier for the payment. This number is automatically generated by the system for a new payment document, based on the number series in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Note

If the Manual numbering check box is selected for the specified numbering sequence in the Number series (CS201010), the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number.

Status

The status of the customer payment, which for a new document is either Balanced or On hold. (The default status of a new document is controlled by the Hold documents on entry option in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.) The status of an existing document can be one of following:

On hold
A user can edit the document but cannot release it. If you clear the Hold check box when you finish editing, the document status changes to Balanced.
Balanced
The credit and debit totals are equal for the newly created customer ledger and it can be released. To change the status of the document to Balanced, clear the Hold check box.
Open
The document is released, but the application amount is less than the payment amount.
Reserved
The document has been released and then put on hold. A user selected the Hold check box for the document with the Open status and the system changed the document status from Open to Reserved. Reserved payments could not be applied to outstanding documents and are excluded from the auto-application process. You can clear the Hold check box to release the payment from hold.
Closed
The document has been released and closed (application amount is equal to the payment amount).
Voided
The document has been voided.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft with the On hold status.

This check box is unavailable for debit adjustments.

Date The date when a payment is applied to a document (invoice or note). The field displays the current business date for unapplied or partially applied payments and the latest application date for the closed payment. You can apply a payment to a number of documents on different application dates. Also, you can use the Balance by customer (AR632500) report to view application dates of the documents.
Financial period The financial period to which the payment should be applied, which the system fills in based on the date.
Payment ref.

A secondary payment reference identifier, which can be:

  • a system-generated number, if the Suggest next customer ledger no. check box is selected for the used cash account in the Payment methods (CA204000) window, or
  • an external reference number entered manually (such as a bank check number).

The system requires a payment reference number if the Require payment reference on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

This field is not available for credit notes.

Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Location

The customer location associated with the sale. Once the customer is selected, this field displays the customer’s default location ID, which can be changed.

This element appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Payment method The customer’s default payment method; this field is not available for credit notes.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Cash account The default cash account associated with the payment method; this field is not available for credit notes. If this is a clearing cash account, the payment will be included in a batch deposit.
Currency

The currency of the payment document.

Once the customer is selected, the system inserts the customer’s default currency, but it may be changed if the customer’s settings allow currency overriding.

Invoice text A user-defined description of the payment. The description may contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Payment amount The total of the payment that is entered manually.
Applied to documents The total of the documents to which payment is to be applied. The total is displayed until payment release.
Applied to orders The total of the orders for which payment is reserved, minus the amount transferred to invoice.
Available balance The amount that has not been applied. This value is non-zero if the payment amount is greater than the document amount.
Write-off amount The amount that has been written off.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges

The total amount of bank charges deducted by bank from the payment amount on your cash account (bank account).

Even if the charges were actually deducted by bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.

ROT or RUT payment (check box) (check box)

A check box that you select to indicate that this is a payment from Skatteverket for ROT and RUT.

Note

By selecting this check box, you can filter on ROT/RUT payments in a generic inquiry.

## The Documents to apply tab This tab includes the list (in a tabular format) of the customer's open documents to which the incoming payment is to be applied. Click **Load documents** in the table toolbar to specify a date range, a range of reference numbers, or both, and the system adds to the list the customer's documents that meet the criteria. If there are open credit notes matching the specified criteria, they appear at the top of the list.
Button Description
Load documents Opens the Load options dialog box, where you can specify criteria for loading the customer’s open invoices or debit notes.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the payment has been created.
Doc. type

The type of document to which the payment is applied. The selection depends on the type of the payment document selected in the top part of the window:

  • A payment may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A credit note, prepayment, and balance write-off may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A customer refund may be applied against the documents of the following types: Credit note, Payment, and Prepayment.
Note

The Overdue charge option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ref. no

The reference number of the invoice or note to which the payment is applied.

If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, on which you can view the details of the selected document.

Customer The identifier of the customer.
Amount paid The amount to be paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount to be taken.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Write-off reason code

A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances.

You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.

Date The creation date of the customer ledger document.
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the document after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of the cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the customer ledger document.
Post period The period to which the payment transactions are to be posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number.
Cross rate A cross rate that you can optionally specify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load documents** in the table toolbar, to add to the list of the customer's open documents the documents that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From ref. no. The document reference number to start with.
End ref. no. The document reference number to end with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria, applies additional filters, if needed, and displays the resulted list of records.

Include child documents

A field where you can select an option to indicate to the system the types of documents that belong to the child customer accounts of the selected parent account that should be loaded along with the documents of the currently selected customer account. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that the system should load none of the documents of the child customer accounts.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the specified criteria.

The field is available if both of the following conditions are met:

Order by

An option you can select to order the listed documents, which can be one of the following:

Due date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by due date and then by reference number. This option is selected by default.
Doc. date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by document date and then by reference number.
Ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order by reference number.
Load (button) Loads the documents matching the specified criteria to the table and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Application history tab This tab is used to store the history of the payment applications. As a result of each application, a batch of journal transactions is generated. All application batches are displayed on this tab.
Button Description
Reverse application

Cancels the payment application.

The button is not available for a document of the Balance write-off type.

To reverse an application for this document type, void the document (Balance write-off) and release the voiding.

The system sets the Voided status to the document ( Balance write-off ) and opens the invoice it has been applied to.

Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Batch number The ID of the batch that contains appropriate transactions. If you click this number, the Journal transactions (GL301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the batch.
Type The type of document to which the payment was applied.
Ref. no The reference number of the customer ledger document to which the payment was applied. If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount taken during the application.
Balance write-off The amount that has been written off.
Financial period The financial period of the payment application.
Date The date of the document (invoice or debit memo).
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The last date when the cash discount for the customer was available.
Balance The remaining amount after the cash discount was taken and certain amount was paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of a cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Post period The period to which payment transactions were posted.
Customer order A reference to the customer document, such as a purchase order number.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT Credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.

VAT doc. no. The number of the VAT document.
## The Orders to apply tab This tab includes the list of the customer's open orders for which the incoming payment is to be reserved. Click **Load orders** in the table toolbar to specify a date range (and, if needed, a range of reference numbers) to add the customer's specific orders to the list.
Button Description
Load orders Opens the Load options dialog box so that you can add the customer’s orders to the list.
Column Description
Order type The order type for which the payment is to be reserved. A customer ledger payment may be reserved for the order types that generate customer ledger documents of the Invoice or Debit note type.
Order no.

The reference number of the order for which the payment is reserved.

By clicking this number, the Sales orders (SO301000) window opens, in which you can view the order details

Status

The status of the document, which is assigned automatically and can be one of the following options:

On hold, Credit hold, Open, Back order, Shipping, Cancelled, Invoiced, or Completed.

For details on statuses, see: About sales order processing options.

Applied to order The total amount reserved for the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount that has been applied to invoice.
Date The creation date of the order.
Due date The due date of the order.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the order after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Description A description of the order.
Order total The total amount of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice generated for the order.
Invoice date The date of the invoice.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load orders** in the table toolbar, to select the order to reserve the payment for.
Element Description
Branch The branch in the company to which the order belongs.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
End order no. The order number to end with.
Start order no. The order number to start with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria and applies additional filters, if needed.

Order by

An option you can select to order the documents on the list, which can be one of the following:

  • Order date, order no.
  • Order no.
Load (button) Displays the documents matching the specified criteria and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the payment document, as well as the date and period of the document. For a released payment, it contains the reference to the batch that implements appropriate transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The batch that contains appropriate transactions. You can click the batch number to view the batch.
Branch The branch that had applied this payment.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default customer ledger account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding default subaccount for the customer.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment date The date of the payment release.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit

A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment should be deposited.

You can change this option if the status of the cash account has been changed. Payments can be deposited only from a clearing cash account.

Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment was deposited.
Batch deposit date The date of the deposit.
Batch deposit no. The number of the deposit that includes the payment.
Payment message A free-form message connected with the payment, max. 140 characters.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges and fees applied to the payment by the bank for processing. For example, if you receive a customer payment where the bank has withdrawn a fee, you can register this bank fee together with the payment. > [!NOTE] > Finance charges cannot be specified for customer refunds, credit notes, and prepayments.
Column Description
Entry type

The charge, selected by its entry type ID.

You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.

Note

A finance charge will be posted as a cash transaction and will not affect the customer ledger.

Description A detailed description of the entry type.
Offset account The account that is used for this charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this charge.
Amount The amount of the charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer price classes (AR208000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000 page In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer price classes (AR208000) In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete **customer price classes**, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. If no other price classes are defined in the system, all customers are assigned to the **BASE** price class. For each customer price class, you can create price lists in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. ## The table This table displays all the customer price classes defined in the system. You can add, edit, and delete classes.
Column Description
Price class ID The unique identifier for the price class. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description

A detailed description of the class. An alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters may be used.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Sort order An integer indicating the order in which this class will be displayed on reports. The price class with the lowest value will be displayed as the leftmost column in all price classes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer statement history (AR404600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600 page You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement history (AR404600) You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part In this area, select a customer to view the statement history for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer by its ID.
## The table This table contains the list of statements printed for the customer selected above. You can print a statement, if needed.
Column Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by ID.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Statement balance The customer balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Overdue balance The overdue balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Currency The currency used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

Customer summary (AR401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000 page You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer summary (AR401000) You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard buttons and a window-specific button. The window-specific button is listed below.
Button Description
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500)
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the criteria of customers to be listed in the table.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to display data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Period The financial period for inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Customer class The customer class selected for inquiry. You can leave the field blank to list customers of all classes.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for customers to be listed.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Currency ID The currency for which you want to display data. You can leave the field blank to view the balances in the all currencies used by the customers if you select the Split by currency check box or in the base currency if you clear the Split by currency check box.
Split by currency A check box that you select to view the customer balances by currency. This check box is visible only if the Currency field is blank.
Only customers with balance A check box that you select to display information on only customers that carry non-zero balances. Clear the check box to display all customers.
By financial period A check box that you select to display balances calculated by financial period rather than by document date. Clear the check box to view the balances calculated by document date.
Consolidate by parent

A check box that you select to indicate to the system to display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidated balance check box is selected on the Invoicing info tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The child accounts are excluded from the list if the check box is selected. The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Total balance A read-only field that shows the total balance for the customers of the selected class or all classes calculated using the specified criteria.
Total prepayments The total amount of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Total unrealised gain/loss The total amount of unrealised gains and losses calculated for transactions matching the selected criteria.
## The table The table contains the list of customers matching the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Customer no. The unique ID of the customer, which is also a link. Click the link to navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) window with the details of this customer.
Customer name The customer name as it appears in the documents.
Last activity period The last period when any transactions related to the customer were released.
Currency ID The currency used by the customer.
Beginning balance (currency) The beginning balance on documents in the specified currency.
Ending balance (currency) The ending balance on documents in the specified currency.
Prepayment balance (currency) The balance of prepayments made in the specified currency.
Sales PTD (currency) Period-to-date sales made in the specified currency.
Payments PTD (currency) Period-to-date payments made in the specified currency.
Cash Discount Taken PTD (currency) The cash discount total on cash discounts takes in the specified currency.
Overdue charges PTD (currency) Period-to-date overdue charges in the specified currency.
Credit notes currency PTD The total on credit notes made in the specified currency.
Debit notes currency PTD The total on debit notes made in the specified currency.
Prepayments PTD (currency) The total on prepayments made in the specified currency.
Beginning balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the start of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the start of the last activity period.

Ending balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the end of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the end of the last activity period.

Prepayment balance The unapplied amount of the customer prepayments.
Sales PTD

The total amount (in the base currency) of the period-to-date (PTD) sales for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total sales amount during the last activity period.

Payments PTD

The total amount of the period-to-date payments (in the base currency) received from the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total payment amount during the last activity period.

Cash discount taken PTD

The total period-to-date amount of cash discounts received by the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total on all the cash discounts taken by the customer during the last activity period.

Realised gain/loss PTD

The total PTD amount of realised gains and losses received as the result of operations with the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total realised gain or loss (RGOL) amount for the customer during the last activity period.

Credit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of credit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total credit note amount for the customer during the last activity period.

Debit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of debit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total of the debit notes for the customer during the last activity period.

Unrealised gain/loss The amount of unrealised gain or loss calculated for open documents.
Prepayments PTD The amount of prepayments received during this period until the current date.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch If you select a line in the table, you can click View batch to see the journal transactions for this line. You can also click the link in the Batch no. column to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
View document If you select a line in the table, you can click View document to see the supplier document for this line. You can also click the link in the Reference no. column to open the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The period from when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
To period The period to when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
Document type

Use this field if you want to filter the list on specific document types:

  • Invoice - lists only sales invoices with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Debit note - lists only debit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit note - lists only credit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Overdue charge - lists only overdue charges with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit write-off - lists only credit write-offs with a VAT zone deviation.
Ref. no. Use this field if you want to see customer VAT deviation for a specific reference number.
## The table
Column Description
Batch no. The batch number that the customer document belongs to.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The customer ledger subaccount of the customer.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Total amount The total document amount.
Document VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the document.
Customer VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the customer.
VAT total The total VAT amount on the document.
Date The date of the customer document.
Post period The post period of the customer document.
Customers (AR303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000 page With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customers (AR303000) With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can enter the needed number of locations and contacts for any customer. When you create a new customer account, first assign the customer to a customer class. This saves you time on data entry because the system inserts the default values of the class into the appropriate window elements; you can override any of these default settings. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) + [Make customer-specific changes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes/) + [Set direct debit preferences for a customer](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-direct-debit-preferences-for-a-customer/) + [Connect contact to customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/connect-contact-to-customer/) + [Delete customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/delete-customer/) + [Enable write-offs for customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer/) + [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) + [Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/) + [Add invoicing settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Add delivery settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) + [Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/) + [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) + [Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-electronic-invoices-for-customers/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/) + [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

View supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window so that you can view this customer’s supplier account if this customer has a supplier account too.
New invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so that you can create a new invoice.
View business account
This window is currently not in use.
New payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, which you can use to define a new payment for the customer.
Write-off balance
Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.
New sales order
Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window so that you can create a new sales order for this customer.
Add location
Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so that you can add a new location for the customer or edit the existing locations.
Add contact
Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window, so that you can add a new contact person for the customer or edit the existing contacts.
Add payment method
Opens the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can add a new payment method for the customer or edit existing payment methods.
Extend to supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window, so that you can define this customer as a supplier and add supplier-specific information.
View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by customer (AR102010) window, which you can use to view the restriction groups this customer is a member of.
Generate statement on demand
This action is currently not in use.
Regenerate last statement
Initiates the regeneration and preparation of the customer’s most recent statement.
Change ID
Gives you the ability to change the ID of the currently selected customer.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry windows:

  • Sales prices: Navigates to the Sales prices (AR202000) window, where you can view or edit sales prices for the selected customer.
  • Customer details: Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window, where you can view detailed information on the customer balance.
  • Customer statement history: Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window, where you can view the statement history for the selected customer and drill down to the details of each statement.
  • Sales by item and customer: Navigates to the Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) window, where you can view detailed information about sales by item and customer.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

## The top part By using the elements in the top part, you can create a new customer account or select an existing account for editing.
Element Description
Customer no.

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Customer name The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Status

The status of the customer account. You can select one of the following options:

Active
The account is in use, and the customer appears on all selection lists.
On hold
This account is not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
Because some payments haven’t been received, invoices may not be entered for the customer account.
Inactive
The account is not available for selection.
One time
The account is marked as a one-time customer.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Consolidated balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.

Retained balance This field is not in use for the customer ledger.
## The General information tab You can use this tab to enter the main contact information of the customer's company, as well as the payment terms and the credit verification rule applied to the customer. If you are defining a new customer, you should first specify its customer class on this tab; once you do, various elements in the window will be filled with the class settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Address 3 The third line of the address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
### The Main contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Account ref. Your company’s account number in the customer’s system.
### The Financial settings section
Element Description
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Once you select the customer class (which is required), the system fills in various elements in this window automatically with the values specified for the specified class; you can, however, change these values.
Terms The type of payment terms used in operations with the customer. You define payment terms in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
Document language

The language in which the documents of the customer will be created.

This field is also used when using the multi-language functionality. For more information, see: About multi-language support.

Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments should be applied automatically to the customer’s documents.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that you may apply overdue charges to this customer.

Note

The overdue charges will be applied to the documents created after you have selected this check box. That is, the system will calculate the overdue charges for the newly created invoices only. The overdue charges will not be calculated for the invoices created earlier than you have selected this check box.

To set up the system to calculate the overdue charges for a document created earlier than you have selected this check box, you can select the Apply overdue charge check box for the document on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed.
Exclude EC sales list Select this check box if you want this customer to be excluded from the EC sales list (AR40501S).
Write-off limit The maximum value that may be written off during each application line. Balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.
Currency ID The currency used in operations with the customer, which you can select from the list of currencies defined in the system.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency specified as the default for the customer.
Currency rate type The currency rate type used for the customer.
Enable rate override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency rate specified as the default for the customer.
Auto load documents

Select how documents for this customer will be automatically loaded in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window for matching.

The following options are available:

Use Cash management settings
To use the setting for automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab. This is the default.
First exact doc. amount, then all documents
All documents will be automatically loaded after the ones with exact matching document amounts have been loaded.
Document with exact amount
The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
Disabled
Automatic loading is not in use.
Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customers (AR303000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for a customer, you will be notified regarding changes. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the specific customer.

More information about webhooks, see: About Webhooks.

### The Credit verification rules section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit rule applied to this customer. The following options are available:

Days past due
Specifies that payment should not exceed the due date of the invoice beyond the credit period (which is a certain number of days past due). This credit period is specified as the Credit days past due.
Credit limit
Doesn’t allow this customer to exceed its credit limit, which is specified in the Credit limit field.
Limit and days past due
Applies both rules to the customer debt: It should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than the credit period.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with this customer.
Credit limit

The amount, if applicable, that serves as a credit limit for the customer.

If the selected customer account is involved in the parent-child relationship, the field displays the credit limit of the group (parent account and its child accounts).

Credit days past due The maximum number of days by which the customer payment may exceed the invoice date. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.

Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.

Remaining credit limit

The credit limit that is not used regarding the current balance.

If the selected customer account is in a parent-child relationship, the field displays the remaining credit limit that applies to new sales orders and invoices of the parent account and its child accounts.

First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.

## The Invoicing settings tab This tab is used to store the customer's default payment information and the invoicing address. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is the same as the main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information. If the check box is cleared, you can enter different information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing contact information is the same as the main information, and the elements below will be populated by the main address information specified on the General settings tab.
Company name The name of the customer’s department as it should appear on the invoicing documents, if it is different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s phone number.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the contact person, in case there are invoicing questions.
Fax The fax number of the contact person.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Web The customer’s invoicing-related web page.
### The Parent info section This section is available if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Parent account

The parent account of the currently selected customer account.

The availability of this field and the list of accounts that can be selected here depend on whether the Consolidate balance and Consolidate statements check boxes are selected for the selected customer account. If both check boxes are cleared, the field is always available and a business account of any type can be specified as the parent account.

If at least one of the check boxes is selected, a business account of the Customer or Customer and supplier type should be specified as the parent account of the selected customer account. This field is disabled if the displayed customer account has child accounts (because an account cannot be both a child and a parent).

For details, see: About setting up parent-child relationships.

Consolidate balance

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the balances of child accounts are included in the parent balance; in this case, the consolidated balance is shown in the Consolidated balance field in the top part of the corresponding parent account.

You can apply the payments and credit notes of the parent account to the documents of this child account. In addition, you can select the Share credit policy check box to apply the credit policy configured for the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About balance consolidation.

Consolidate statements

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

Shared credit policy

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the credit policy (a combination of the credit verification rules and credit limit) defined for its parent account will be applied to the new sales orders and invoices of the child account. The check box becomes available for selection, if the Consolidate balance check box has been selected for this account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

### The Print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices by email by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send dunning letters by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters by email by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Print dunning letters

A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Send statements by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.

Multi-currency statements

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this customer’s statements must be printed in multi-currency format.

If the check box is cleared, the system will print statements for the customer in the base-currency format. The check box is displayed if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in your system.

Print statements A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be printed in the Print statements (AR503500) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with the customer, which can be one of the following:

Open item
The statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Document language field in the General information tab. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.

Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This setting is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.

Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When selected, the system opens the first document attached to AutoInvoice. This way, you save time by not having to check the attachments manually.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.

### The Default payment method section
Element Description
Default payment method The default payment method used for the customer.
Cash account The cash account to be used for the default payment method.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Account used for payment The type of the account used for payments, such as Domestic payment.
### The Payment method details table This section holds the details of the payment method used by the customer if such details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Element Description
Description The name of a user-defined column configured to contain a detail of the payment method.
Value The value of this payment method detail.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer. ### The Shipping address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the delivery address is the same as the customer’s main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information specified on the General settings tab.

If the check box is not selected, you can change the delivery address.

Address 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address 3 The third line of the delivery address.
Postcode The customer’s postal code. If an input mask is set for the country postal codes, provide a valid code that matches the input mask.
City The customer’s delivery location city.
Country The customer’s country. By default, it is the country of your company.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer location on the map.
### The Shipping contact section This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer.
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer’s main information is used as its shipping info, and the elements below display the main company information.
Company name The business name of the customer’s shipping location, if it’s different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person.
Email The email address of the customer’s department to be used in case of delivery problems.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Fax The fax number of the customer’s receiving department.
### The Default location settings section
Element Description
Location name A description of the customer location.
VAT zone

The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

If a customer has been converted from a prospect account or extended from a supplier account, the customer’s VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone (if any) specified for the original account. You can override the default value.

Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice
Invoice to default location

A check box that you select to indicate that sales invoices and sales order for this customer automatically have the default invoice address and invoice contact.

The invoice address and invoice contact can be overridden manually for each sales invoice in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, the Invoice address tab, and each sales order in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, the Financial settings tab.

Shipping branch The branch of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer.
Price class ID The price class assigned to the customer. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the customer and can be used as a condition to be met for a discount application.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the customer.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Ship via The carrier used to ship the goods.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for the customer.
Shipping zone ID The identification of the shipping zone of the customer to be used to calculate freight.
FOB point The location at which the title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that delivery will not be performed to a business.
Saturday delivery A check box that you select to indicate that this customer allows delivery on Saturdays.
Insurance A check box that informs a user (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The way the orders should be fulfilled for this customer. You can use one of the following options:

Shipping complete
Only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
Back orders are allowed for the customer if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
Orders should be shipped even if the quantities shipped are less than the quantities specified on the order. If all the requested items are out of stock, the order should be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this customer. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days preceding the due date for the shipping title to reach the customer.
### Intrastat
Element Description
Mode of transportation

Intrastat is the system for collecting information and producing statistics on the trade in goods between countries of the European Union (EU).

The mode of transportation denotes how the goods is transported. Available values are:

0 - Unknown

1 - Transport by sea

2 - Transport by rail

3 - Transport by road

4 - Transport by aeroplane

5 - Consignments by post

7 - Fixed transport installations

8 - Transport by inland waterway

## The Locations tab This tab contains a table showing the customer's locations. You can select any location as the default one. This tab is available only if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The **MAIN** location is always automatically created for the customer when you enter the customer's main address.
Button Description
Add location Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so you can enter a new customer location.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected location. Only one location can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location is active. If the check box is cleared, the location will not be available for selection when users create customer documents.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location has been set as the default customer location. You cannot directly select or clear this check box; to make a location the default location, you select the location and click Set as default in the toolbar.
Location ID The unique ID of the location.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer’s location.
City The city of the customer’s location.
Country The country of the customer’s location.
County The county or province of the customer’s location.
VAT zone A VAT zone associated with the county.
Price class ID The price class to be used by default for this customer location.
Sales account The account selected in the Sales account field in the Customer locations (CR303010) window.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
## The Payment methods tab This tab contains the list of payment methods that can be accepted from the customer. You can select any method as the default one.
Button Description
Add payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can define a new payment method for the customer.
View payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can view the details of the customer payment method. Customer payment methods have the Override check box selected.
Column Description
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is the default one for the customer. You select this check box to mark the payment method as the default one for this customer.
Payment method The payment method ID.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is used in the system.
Override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is specific to the customer (that is, it was created by using the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window).
## The Contacts tab This tab displays a table showing the customer's contact persons and their information. To add a new contact, click **Add contact**. To view or change the details of a particular contact, click the link in the **Name** field, which opens the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window for the contact.
Button Description
Add contact Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can enter a new contact.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected contact person. Only one contact can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact is active.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact person is the default one for the customer.
Position The position the contact person has in his or her company.
Name The contact person’s name. You can click the link in this column to open the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window.
City The contact person’s city.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Phone 1 The contact person’s phone number.
## The Salespersons tab The **Salespersons** tab contains the list of salespersons associated with the customer's locations.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The ID of the salesperson who is assigned to the customer.
Name The salesperson’s name.
Location ID The customer location associated with the salesperson.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer location.
Commission % The commission percent used for the salesperson. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that this salesperson is the default salesperson for this customer.
## The Child accounts tab This tab contains the list of child customers that belong to a selected parent together with their balance information. This is only visible when selecting a parent customer in the customer field and if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window
Column Description
Customer no

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.

Customer name . The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.

Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.

First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.

Consolidate balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.

Consolidate statement

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.

Share credit policy A check box that indicated, if selected that the credit policy configured for the parent account applies to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.
Statement cycle The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes defined in the associated customer class. Attributes defined in the business account class or supplier class to which the related business account or supplier (if any) belongs may also be listed on this tab. You specify the value of the attributes from the list, if required.
Column Description
Attribute The description of the attribute.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that specifying the attribute value is required.
Value The value of the attribute.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the customer. You use this tab to associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the customer.
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window so you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window so you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window so you can send an email to the customer.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the list of available activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The username of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Related entity description The entity that this activity is associated with.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Project

The project with which the activity is associated, or the code indicating that this activity is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Project task

The task in the project with which the activity is associated.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Released A check box that indicates whether or not the activity is released.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab shows the default general ledger accounts for this customer. For a new customer, the accounts and subaccounts initially displayed on this tab are, by default, those specified for the customer class you have selected on the **General information** tab; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount used for the customer.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customer. By default, it is the account specified for the customer class. You must specify this account.
Sales non-taxable account The account for non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The account for sales within the European Union.
Sales - export account The account for export sales.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record the sales made to the customer. You must specify the subaccount.
Discount account

The expense account used to record discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify the account if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage discounts.

Discount sub.

The subaccount (if any) used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify this subaccount if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for delivering goods to the customer.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record freight charges applied for delivering the goods to the customer.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify the account.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify this subaccount.
Prepayment account The asset account to accumulate prepayments to the customer.
Prepayment sub. The subaccount used with the prepayment account to record the prepayment amounts sent to the customer.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab displays the mailings that can be used for the customer. Mailings are used to set up the sending of electronic versions of specific documents to the customer contacts and company employees that are specified as recipients for the customers. For example, emails for the **INVOICE** mailing are sent when a user clicks **Email invoice** in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window toolbar for the selected invoice. By default, on this tab, mailings selected for the customer class are listed, but you can select other mailings from the lists defined in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) and [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) windows. For an overview of the functionality, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, which has the list of recipients. ### The Mailings table In this table, you can view and modify the list of mailings to be used for the customer. Initial settings from the customer class can be overridden for any customer.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch of the organisation on behalf of which this mailing will be set up.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails to the customer for this mailing. If no account is specified, the system account specified for the customer class will be used.
Report The Customer ledger report to be used to structure the information from the document, if a report is selected for the mailing rather than an email template (notification template).
Notification template The notification template to be used to generate personalised emails for the mailing. For each mailing, either a report or a notification template can be specified.
Format The format in which the report-based document, if applicable, will be sent by default if the recipient has no other preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Only active mailings are used to generate emails.
Overridden A check box that indicates (if selected) that the default mailing for the customer class has been changed.
### The Recipients table By using the this table you can select recipients (one per line) for the mailing selected in the Mailings table.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails. Specify one of the following options:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s invoicing contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the customer’s documents or is otherwise associated with the customer
Contact
Any additional contact of the customer
Document contact
The contact specified on the document, e.g. the sales order or invoice.
Contact ID The particular recipient of the selected type.
Email The email address of this recipient.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to this recipient. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
To A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will be the main recipient for this mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will receive a blind carbon copy (bcc) of the email for this mailing.
## The Other invoice settings tab The Finvoice invoices are in use in Finland only.
Column Description
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator.
## The Direct debit tab The Direct debit functionality is in use in the Netherlands only.
Column Description
Mandate ID The unique ID for the direct debit mandate.
Mandate description The description of the direct debit mandate.
Date of signature The date the customer signed the direct debit mandate.
Is default If you select this check box, you indicate which mandate is used as default value in a sales invoice if more than one mandate is linked to the customer.
One time If you select this check box, you indicate that this is a one-time mandate.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC code of the customer’s bank account.
IBAN The IBAN of the customer’s bank account.
Last collection date The date of the last direct debit transaction for this mandate.
Max. amount The maximum amount that can be collected for this mandate in a single transaction.
Expiration date The date when the mandate expires.
Branch The ID of the branch being used.
## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a customer, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific customer. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Discount codes (AR209000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000 page You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discount codes (AR209000) You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of discounts, you specify discount sequences for each discount code in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The Discount codes table This table contains all the discount codes defined in the system and can be used to create new discounts.
Column Description
Discount code The unique code for the discount. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers.
Description A brief description of the discount. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Discount type

The type of the discount, which can be one of the following options:

Line
The discount applies to a document line.
Document
The discount applies to the document amount.
Group
The discount applies to multiple lines in the same document.
Applicable to

The entity to which the discount may be applied. For a Line or Group discount, you can select one of the following options:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item.
Item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to items of specific price class.
Customer and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and specific item.
Customer and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and items of a specific price class.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class.
Customer price class and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and a specific item.
Customer price class and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and to items of a specific price class.
Warehouse
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item sold from a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and items of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and to a customer of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.

For a document discount, the following options are available:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Customer and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific branch.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of specific customer price class.
Customer price class and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class and a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally; this option is mostly used for promotional discounts.
Applied to deferred revenue A check box that (if selected) indicates that a discount should be applied to a component price while computing a deferred revenue for the component. This option is applied to the Line discounts only. This check box is only available if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Manual A check box that (if selected) indicates that this discount is excluded from automatic searches for the best available discount. A user can, however, add manual discounts to a document line or to a document.
Exclude from discountable amount A check box that (if selected) indicates that the line amount is excluded from the amount that is the base for any applicable Group or Document discount. This option is available for only line-level discounts.
Skip document discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that after this discount has been applied, no other applicable discounts should be applied. This option is available to only Group discounts.
Auto-numbering A check box that you select to use auto-numbering for generating IDs for series based on this discount code. By default, the discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs, but you can instead specify in the Last number column a series of characters to be used as a template for auto-numbering.
Last number The last ID used for the series if series IDs are auto-numbered. If you enter a series of characters here before any series is created, the character series will be used as a template for auto-numbering. The character series may contain up to 10 characters with digits at the end. The last letter used divides the character series into a prefix and the integer to be auto-incremented. If no value is specified, the discount code will be used as a prefix.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Discounts (AR209500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500 page You use this window to define the series for discount codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discounts (AR209500) You use this window to define the series for discount codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define the series for discount codes. A discount series specifies exactly how the discount is calculated, based on the amount or quantity of the line item, or on the amount of the document. A series for a discount includes a list of breakpoints, with each break point specifying the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts that are qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update discounts Opens the Update discounts dialog box, which you can use to select pending discount series by their start date (pending date) for updating. As a result of updating, the current discount amounts (or per cents) become the last discount amounts (or per cents), and the pending discount amounts (or per cents) become the current discounts.
### The Update discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to select discount series by pending date and to update the discounts.
Element Description
Filter date The latest pending date to select discount series for updating.
OK (button) Updates the discounts that are selected based on the specified date.
Cancel (button) Cancels your selection and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In this part you can create a new discount series for the discount and specify its general options, or select an existing series and view its options.
Element Description
Discount code The code of the discount for which you want to create a new series or view an existing one.
Series

The ID of the series defined for the discount. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.

An ID will be generated by the system if auto-numbering is selected for the discount in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.

Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is active.

Active series for the same discount should not have overlapping time intervals, or if they do, the series should apply to different entities.

Promotional

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is a promotional discount.

For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date ( End date ).

Description A brief description of the series. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Discount by

The way the discount for the series is specified. The following options are available:

Percent
The discount is specified by a percentage.
Amount
The discount is specified by a fixed amount.
Free item
The discount is defined by a specific quantity of a certain free item added to an order. This option is used only with group-level discounts.
Break by

The way the breakpoints for this discount series are specified. Select one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified amounts.
Prorate discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount can be prorated.

With prorated discounts, the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) is calculated as if the order is split into multiple orders, so that the customer can get the largest possible discount. To determine the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, by using the largest possible break point quantities.

It then calculates the discount amount (or the number of free items) according to the breakpoints used.

Effective date The date when the series becomes effective. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Expiration date The date when the promotional discount expires. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when the discount series was last updated. This field appears only for a non-promotional discount series; the system inserts a value if the series has been updated at least once.
## The Discount breakpoints tab You use the **Discount breakpoints** tab to create a breakdown series defined in accordance with the options selected in the top part, or to view the details of an existing series. The columns on this tab's table generally depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** fields. ### If Quantity is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break quantity The quantity of items (break quantity) that starts the new range for a discount level for the currently effective series. Any break quantity should be specified in the base units.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Discount amount The discount amount to be used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break quantity The quantity of items (break point) that starts the new range for the pending (not yet effective) series.
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used with the pending break point for the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The amount to be used as the discount for the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break quantity The quantity of item (break point) that started the range for the discount series used before the effective date.
Last discount percent The discount percent used for the break point for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last date The date when the current series became effective.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line or document amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Discount percent The discount percent to be used for the amounts that exceed this break amount for the currently effective series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (one that is not yet in effect).
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used for the break point in the pending series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last discount percent The percentage used for the break point in the previously effective series.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option and Free item as the Discount by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for this discount series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (the one that is not yet in effect).
Pending free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for the pending discount series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last free item qty. The quantity of the free item that was used as the discount for the previously effective series.
### Table columns (the Promotional check box is selected)
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the promotional series.
Discount amount The amount of the discount for this range for the promotional series.
## The Free item tab The **Free item** tab of the window displays the free item that is added as the discount, as well as the free item pending to be added and the free item previously added. This tab appears only if **Free item** is selected in the **Discount by** field.
Element Description
Free item The free item (by its item ID) that is added to orders as the discount for this series.
Pending free item The free item (by its item ID) that will be added to orders as the discount for this series, starting on the date specified in the Pending date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last free item The free item (by its item ID) that had been added to orders as the discount for this series before the date shown in the Last date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when this discount series has been updated last.
## The Items tab The **Items** tab of the window has a table showing the items to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item** (**Item**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer price class and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Item ID The stock or non-stock item, by its item ID, to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the item.
## The Item price classes tab The **Item price classes** tab of the window has a table with the item price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item price class** (**Item price class**, **Customer and item price class**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Price class ID The item price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the item price class.
## The Customers tab The **Customers** tab of the window has a table with the customers to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer** (**Customer**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer The customer to which the series is applicable.
Description The business name of the customer.
## The Customer price classes tab The **Customer price classes** tab of the window has a table with the customer price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer price class** (**Customer price class**, **Customer price class and item**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer price class ID The customer price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the customer price class.
## The Warehouses tab The **Warehouses** tab of the window has a table that lists the warehouses to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Warehouse** (**Warehouse**, **Warehouse and item**, **Warehouse and customer price class**, **Warehouse and customer**, or **Warehouse and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Warehouse ID The warehouse to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the warehouse.
## The Branches tab The **Branches** tab of the window has a table showing the branches to which the series can be applied. This tab appears only if the **Branch** option is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. For more information on producing dunning letters, see: [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part, select a customer and date range to view the history of dunning letters for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its ID.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of dunning letters.
End date The end date in the date range for which to display the history of dunning letters.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. Only displayed if you are using multiple branches.
Customer The customer account associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The customer name.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Number of documents The number of documents listed in the letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part you specify a customer, date range, and range of the dunning letter levels to view the history of the documents.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
End date The end date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
Element Description
From The starting level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
To The ending level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents that were included in the dunning letters generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000), where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Type The type of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Document balance The balance of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Dunning letter status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
The dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
The dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
The dunning letter is voided and the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Dunning letters (AR306000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000 page If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letters (AR306000) If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. When you have finished making adjustments, you can release the draft and then print, email, or void the released letter. If you have selected the dunning process by customer, by using this window you can print, email, or void the released letter. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [Manage dunning letters - overview.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/) This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. This window is not displayed in the navigation pane. You access the window by selecting a record and clicking **View dunning letter** on one of the following windows: + [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Release Releases the selected dunning letter.
Void Voids the selected dunning letter.
Print Prints the selected dunning letter.
## The top part In the top part you can view the letter status, level and date, as well as the customer account for which the letter was generated. If an amount of the dunning fee was specified for the level of the letter, the link to the invoice is displayed after you release the letter.
Element Description
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been released and can be printed, emailed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the dunning level of documents listed in this letter is decreased and these documents are available for preparing a new letter.
Dunning letter level

The level of this dunning letter. The system uses the value of this box to define for which dunning fee amount the invoice should be generated.

If there are documents with different dunning level are included in the letter, the system uses the highest level (among document levels) to set as the dunning level of the letter. You can delete documents with the highest level to decrease the level of the letter.

Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Dunning letter date The creation date of this dunning letter.
Fee ref. no. The reference number of the invoice that was created for the dunning fee amount specified for this level of the dunning letter. The invoice is created when you release the dunning letter. You can click the link to view document details.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents to be included in the dunning letter.
Button Description
Revoke Excludes the selected document from the dunning process. The action is available for dunning letters with the Draft status. After you have excluded a document, you can again include the document in the dunning process by clearing the Revoked check box on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Due date The due date of the document.
Original document amount The original document amount.
Overdue balance The overdue amount of the document.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/expiring-customer-contracts-ct401000 page In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the **Renew automatically** check box selected. Contracts may be selected by customer class, contract template, and expiration period. ## Expiration window Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display contracts.
Duration The number of days included in the date range. The system will display contracts with expiration dates in this date range.
Show contracts available for mass renewal A check box that you select to include the auto-renewable contracts that will expire during the specified date range.
Customer class The class of the customers with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all classes.
Contract template A contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria set in the top part. You can select a contract and view its details.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract’s ID. Click the ID to navigate to the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to see the details of the selected contract.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract, by ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Last invoicing date The date of the most recent invoicing for the contract.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

GDPR - personal data (GA000081) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081 page The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # GDPR - personal data (GA000081) The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With the help of the details registered in this window, you can provide the users with the information you have stored about them in the system if they request it. ## The top part In the top part, select the user for whom you want to view the stored information.
Element Description
Contact The user whose details are registered.
## The table This table contains the details of the user that are used when collecting personal data on the user.
Column Description
Display name The name of the user that is used in the different windows of the system.
Address 1 The first address line of the user’s address.
Address 2 The second address line of the user’s address.
Address 3 The third address line of the user’s address.
Postcode The postcode of the user’s address.
City The city of the user’s address.
County The county of the user’s address.
Country The country of the user’s address.
Email The email address of the user.
Phone 1 The telephone number 1 of the user.
Phone 2 The telephone number 2 of the user.
Phone 3 The telephone number 3 of the user.
Fax The user’s fax number.
Date of birth The user’s date of birth.
Created by The user who has registered the user details.
Created on The date when the user details have been created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the details of the user.
Last modified The date when the details of the user have been last modified.
Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000 page You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information, see [Schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/). The schedules to be processed are filtered by the date that you specify in the **Execution date** field. You also need to specify the condition on which the system will stop running the schedules. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original (**Scheduled**) documents as templates to generate similar documents. For each processed schedule, after the required documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed** date. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table) and generates documents with an Open status.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
New schedule Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, from which you can create a new schedule.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date

The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Those schedules whose Next execution date is earlier than or equal to the date specified in this field are loaded. Clear the field to display all schedules.

By default, the current business date is displayed.

Stop on execution date An option button that indicates that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that indicates that the system stops running schedules when the specified number of schedule executions have been performed. You specify the number of schedule executions in the field located near this option button.
## The table The table contains the list of active schedules that match the settings you have specified. You can select the check boxes to include schedules for processing.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you can use to select this schedule for processing.
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique ID.

By clicking the number, the system opens the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window as a dialog window; in this window, you can view the details of the selected schedule.

Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the documents attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated, according to the schedule.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500 page In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). For more information: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the **Reduce taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window). You can generate credit notes for the documents you select or for all listed documents. After the generated credit note or notes are released, the cash discount amounts will be applied to the appropriate documents, and the documents will be closed. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating credit notes for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating credit notes for all listed documents.
## The top part Here, you can select specific parameters for filtering the documents to be shown in the table below.
Element Description
Date

The date, which you select to view unprocessed documents with payment dates earlier than or the same as the selected date.

By default, the current business date is selected.

Branch The branch for which you want to view documents. By default, the company branch is specified.
Customer

The customer whose documents you want to view. You can leave this field empty to view the documents of all customers.

Note

If the parent-child relationships are established between customer accounts (that is, if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and if the parent company has paid the invoice of the child company, you can create the credit note for the child company by selecting the customer that represents the parent company in this field (or by leaving this field empty).

Consolidate credit notes by customer

A check box that indicates (if selected) that one credit note will be generated for multiple documents grouped by the branch, customer, customer location, currency, customer ledger account (and customer ledger subaccount, if any), and VAT zone.

The check box is selected by default. If you clear this check box, a separate credit note will be generated for each document.

Credit note date

The date to be used as the date of the credit note.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, the current business date is selected.

Period

The financial period, which you select to post credit notes.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, it is the period of the current business date.

## The table This table contains the list of documents for which early payments were made.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document in the row relates.
Customer The customer specified in the document of this row.
Doc. type The type of the document in this row.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the document in the system.
Doc. date The document date.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The total document amount.
Cash discount The amount of the cash discount applied to the document.
Payment terms The payment terms specified for the document.
Payment ref. no. The number that identifies the related payment in the system.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Import incoming payments (AR305500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/import-incoming-payments-ar305500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import incoming payments (AR305500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
Ref. no. Select the reference number of the document you want to process or create a new one.
Import date The date when the payment was imported.
## The table
Buttons Description
Unhide transaction Click this to unhide a selected transaction. This will clear the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the transaction. The transaction becomes available for processing in the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window.
Unmatch Click this to unmatch a matched transaction.
View matched document Click this to view the details of the matched document.
Column Description
Matched This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been matched.
Processed This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been processed.
Hidden This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been hidden.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Module The module from which the transaction originates.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Workspace The involved workspace in the system.
Incoming payments history (AR407000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming payments history (AR407000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
From date The date from which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
To date The date until which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
Statement no. The number of the statement whose transactions you want to view.
## The table
Element Description
Statement no. The number of the statement from which the transaction comes.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the disbursement.
Disbursement The amount of the receipt.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates.
Type The type of the original transaction.
Ref. no. The reference number of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice history by item (AR40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s page You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice history by item (AR40105S) You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on customer invoice lines, regardless if they have a connection to a sales order. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the invoice history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for whom you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID. You can click the link to view the details of the item in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

Manage credit holds (AR523000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000 page By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit holds (AR523000) By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the processing, based on the selected action, of the customer accounts you have selected.
Process all Initiates the processing of all customer accounts listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, you can specify the time interval during which the final dunning letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The operation the system performs if you click Process or Process all. The following options are available:

  • Apply credit hold: Prevents users from creating any new sales orders for the selected customers.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for applying the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was not applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.

  • Release credit hold: Takes the selected customer accounts off hold so that new sales orders can be created.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for releasing the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.

Show all A check box that you select to have the table include all the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range. If you do not select this check box, the table will display the customers as specified in the description of the Action field.
Start date

The starting date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.

End date

The ending date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.

## The table This table contains the list of customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range.
Column Description
Customer no. An ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date

The date when the final letter was generated.

The column is available if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Overdue balance The overdue amount owed by the customer.
Customer balance The total amount of the open customer documents.
Status The status of the customer account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Manual payments (AR30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s section In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments (AR30200S) In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process

Click the check boxes to select the documents for which you want to create payments and click Process. The selected documents are processed and the system creates a Reference number from Payments for each payment.

icon-confirmation is displayed to the left of each document that has been processed successfully.

## The top part
Element Description
Due date less than or equal to The due date of the documents to be displayed in the table is less than or equal to the date you select here.
Payment method The payment methods of the documents to be displayed in the table. If you do not select anything here, in the table are displayed documents with all payment methods.
## The table
Button Description
View document View the sales invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
View payment View the payment invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
Column Description
Document type

The type of the document. The options are:

  • Invoice
  • Debit note
  • Credit note
  • Overdue charge
  • Credit write-off
Invoice ref. no. The invoice number. Sort and drill down to see the invoice.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Amount The document amount.
Balance The balance of the document.
Amount paid The actual amount paid.
Payment date The date of the payment release. You can edit the pay date, so that overdue charges will be calculated correctly.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Ref. no. from Payments Shows the reference number after you have processed the payments.
KID-number The customer identification number from the payment.
Date The date on the invoice.
Currency The currency used on the invoice.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash account The cash account connected with the invoice.
Payment method The description of the payment method used on the invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Overdue charges (AR204500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500 page In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charges (AR204500) In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. You define the overdue charges by creating overdue charge codes. You can create as many overdue charge codes (particular overdue charge entities with its own settings) as needed. For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). Before you create an overdue charge code, you need to create appropriate payment terms by using the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window that define the due date for paying the documents of the **Overdue charge** type. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General settings section This section contains several sections with various information about the overdue charges. You use the elements in this section to define a new overdue charge code and its settings, or to select an existing code and view its settings.
Element Description
Overdue charge ID The unique ID for the overdue charge code. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of the overdue charge code. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters
Calculation method

The way the system calculates charges for overdue documents. The following options are available:

Interest on open entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance as of the date of calculation. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on open, partially paid, and paid entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on paid entries
The overdue document becomes subject to charges at the moment it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days.
Terms The payment terms that apply to generated documents of the Overdue charge type. You create payment terms by using the Payment terms (CS206500) window to provide a schedule for paying this overdue charge.
Base currency A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the currency of an overdue document.
Overdue charge account The account to which collected overdue charges are recorded.
Overdue charge subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
VAT category The VAT category, if applicable to this overdue charge and overdue fee (if any).
## The Overdue fee settings section You use the elements in this section to define an overdue fee that is associated with the selected overdue charge code.
Element Description
Fee amount The amount of the fee for an overdue charge document (if your company charges any). If the Base currency check box is selected, the fee is charged in the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the fee is charged in the currency of the overdue document.
Fee account The account to which the overdue fee is recorded.
Fee subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Description

A description of the overdue fee.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The Charging settings section You use the elements in this section to define the criteria the system uses for generating a document of the **Overdue charges** type.
Element Description
Total threshold The minimum amount of overdue charges that should initiate the generation of a document of the Overdue charge type.
Charging method

The way the system charges an overdue document. An overdue charge can be defined either as a fixed amount or as a percentage (annual rate) on a document’s open balance for the number of days late. The following options are available:

  • Fixed amount: The system charges overdue documents for a fixed amount. You specify the fixed amount in the Amount field, which appears when you select the Fixed amount charging method.

  • Percent with threshold: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated overdue charge amount with the threshold amount (which you enter in the Threshold field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the specified threshold amount, the system does not charge the document.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the threshold amount, the system charges the document for the calculated charge amount.
  • Percent with min. amount: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated charge amount with the minimum amount (which you enter in the Min. amount field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the minimum amount.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the calculated charge amount.
Amount

The amount that the system uses as the fixed charge amount for overdue documents when the Fixed amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Charging method field.

Threshold

The threshold amount of overdue charges, which defines whether to charge an overdue document when the Percent with threshold charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with threshold option is selected in the Charging method field.

Min. amount

The minimum amount that the system uses to charge an overdue document when the Percent with min. amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with min. amount option is selected in the Charging method field.

## The Rates table You use the elements in this table to define rates and their effective start date. The system uses the percent rate in the row that has the most recent start date at the time of overdue charge calculation. This table is only available if the **Percent with threshold** or **Percent with min. amount** option is selected in the **Charging method** field.
Element Description
Start date The date when the rate in this row becomes effective.
Percent rate The annual percentage rate to be used to calculate an overdue charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Packaging types (CS207600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Packaging types (CS207600) You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. Such parameters of packages as dimensions, tare weight, and maximum weight capacity are used for automatic packaging and for freight calculation for shipments. ## The table This table provides information about the packages to be used for shipping. > [!NOTE] > After you have added a new package to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Column Description
Box ID The ID of the type of packages. An alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters may be used.
Description A description of the content of the package.
Tare weight The weight of an empty package of this type, may include the weight of any packaging material used to pack items inside the package.
Max. weight The maximum weight a package of that type can hold.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Max. volume The maximum volume of items that can fit into a package of the type.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the volume as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Length

The length of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Width

The width of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Height

The height of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.

Active by default If you select this check box, the package will be added by default to the list of packages on the Packages tab of the Ship via codes (CS207500) window for each new ship via code.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000 page In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. The intervals between successive dunning letters of different levels are defined on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you generate dunning letters by using the current window, you can review and process them further in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for the selected records or those for which you have selected the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for all the records in the table.
## The top part Here, you can make selections to narrow the list of records.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. You can select a particular customer class to view only customers of the class that have overdue balances, or leave the field blank to view all customers with overdue balances.
Customer The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The date to be specified on the generated letters.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that you select to include unpaid documents that are not yet due in the preparation of dunning letters.
Include credit note documents A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.
Split by documents reference number A check box that indicates, if selected, that the table below will contain information split by the documents reference number. If not selected, the table will contain documents grouped by customer.
This section is displayed if **Dunning process** is set to **By document** on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.
Element Description
All overdue documents The option button that you select to include all the overdue documents of a customer into the dunning letters preparation process.
Dunning letter level The option button that you select to include into the dunning letters preparation process those overdue documents whose level is in the range specified in the From and To fields.
From The starting level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
To The ending level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
## The table The table contents depends on the option selected in the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window: By customer : The table lists the customer accounts that have at least one overdue document. By document : The table lists the overdue documents grouped by customer and by document dunning level. For instance: If a customer account has two overdue documents with different levels, the system will display two rows in the table. If a customer account has two documents with the same level, the system will group the documents into one row.
Column Description
Customer class The customer class of the customer.
Customer The identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Earliest due date The due date of the oldest overdue invoice of the customer.
Branch The branch on behalf of which the letter will be sent. If one consolidated letter is generated for all branches, the branch selected as the letter sender on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is shown.
Overdue balance The overdue amount that is due from the customer (sum of open invoices, overdue charges and debit notes).
Number of overdue documents The number of overdue documents of the customer for which a dunning letter of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Customer balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments.
Number of documents The number of overdue and other unpaid documents of the customer for which a dunning letters of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter to be generated for the customer.
Last dunning letter date The date of the previous dunning letter, if any has been generated.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Prepare statements (AR503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000 page In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare statements (AR503000) In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements for the cycles you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of statements for all cycles listed in the window.
## The Statements table In this table, you can select the statement cycles you want to process. Statements will be prepared in the format required for printing or for sending by email, as specified for each customer or customer class. To view and further process statements, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. You can get a detailed statement history through inquiries.
Column Description
Prepare for The date for which you want to prepare statements.
Cycle ID The unique ID of the cycle.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statements for the cycle were last generated.
Last finance charge date The date when overdue charges were last calculated for the customers.
Schedule type The selected statement cycle processing option. The following values are available: The end of the month, A fixed day of the month, and Custom.
Next statement date The date when the statements should be generated next, according to the cycle settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Send invoices (AR508000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000 page From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices (AR508000) From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also email selected documents for those customers who prefer to receive documents by email (that is, the **Send invoices by email** check box is selected for the customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Invoicing settings** tab) or mark them to indicate that they should not be emailed. For details, see: [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/). ## What to do from this window + [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/) + [Email several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/email-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/) + [Print invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice/) + [Print several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-and-send-invoices-or-credit-notes-by-regular-mail/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of all documents, with the specific type of processing dependent on the action selected, listed in the table.
View document Displays the selected document in the window in which it was originally created.
## The top part Here, you can select the type of processing to be done if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, for invoices associated with contract servicing, you can select invoices by the user or work group that owns them.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following options are available:

  • Mark as do not email: Marks the selected documents as ones that should not be emailed.

  • Email invoice/note: Generates emails for the selected documents (or all documents) in accordance with the INVOICE mailing settings.

  • Print invoice/note: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the status of the AutoInvoice column in the table.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice, awaiting processing
    • Pending, awaiting delivery
    • Sent, the invoice is sent
    • Error, to check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice

If applicable, it also updates the Business level status found in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Select this action to send this invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Print overdue charge: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.

Show all A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) to display all the documents with a status other than Closed, regardless of specified selection criteria.
Show closed invoices/credit notes

(This check box appears when you select the Poll invoice status or the Send to AutoInvoice action.)

When this check box is selected, the system will display all documents with the Closed status.

Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table This table contains the list of documents that match the criteria specified in the to part and were not printed or emailed before (that is, the **Printed** or **Emailed** check box is cleared in the document settings).
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice status The status of the invoice in AutoInvoice.
Sending method Here you can select the sending method: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice sent by Here you can filter the invoices on the manner it was sent to AutoInvoice. The options are: Home network, Email, Print, Print PRIORITY, e-invoice, Bank network, N/A.
AutoInvoice error message If the invoice has an error in AutoInvoice, the error message from AutoInvoice is displayed here.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process customer refunds (AR50300S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer refunds (AR50300S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create customer refunds Click this to create customer refunds and to open a window, where you can view the status of your refunds and send them to AutoPay.
## The top part ### The Filter documents on section
Element Description
Payment method Select the payment method you want to filter on.
Cash account Select the cash account you want to filter on.
Date before Select the date before you want to filter on.
Customer Select the customer you want to filter on.
### The Input section
Element Description
Payment method Select the preferred payment method. You can only select from payment methods that have the Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers) check box selected in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The Cash account is automatically displayed, but you can select another one if you want to.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place.
Currency The currency of the refund. If you have a cash account that uses foreign currency, you can use the View base button to view the amount(s) in the base currency instead of the foreign currency.
Customer The customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Post period The post period of the refund.
### The Calculation section
Element Description
GL balance General ledger balance
Available balance Available balance
Selection total The total of the selected documents
Bank balance Bank balance
Documents to pay The number of documents to pay.
## The table
Column Description
Doc. type The document type of the payment to be refunded.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Customer The number of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer account The account of the customer to which the refund will be paid.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment refund.
Pay separately Select this if you want to pay the refund separately.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place. The suggested date is today’s date.
Amount paid In the Amount paid column, verify the suggested amount or change the amount you want to refund.
Balance The remaining balance of the payment that can be refunded.
Currency The currency of the balance.
Balance (original currency) The balance of the payment in the original currency.
Reprint invoices (AR50801S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reprint invoices (AR50801S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates reprinting of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates reprinting of all documents listed in the table.
View document Shows the document connected with the invoice/note selected in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following option is available:

Reprint invoice/note
Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Sent to AutoInvoice
when you select this option, the table displays all documents that were sent to AutoInvoice during the selected date range. You can then initiate the process of printing selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.

Related pages

Windows

Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000 page You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. For more information: [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the letters you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of all letters listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**, as well as the date range when the letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken if you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

Print dunning letter
Initiates the process of printing each dunning letter for sending by mail.
Email dunning letter
Initiates the process of sending each dunning letter electronically to customers.
Mark as: do not email
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not email check box.
Mark as: do not print
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not print check box.
Release dunning letter
Initiates the process of releasing dunning letters with the Draft status. If a dunning fee amount is specified for this level, the system creates and releases an invoice for the fee amount. This invoice does not include the due documents listed in the letter.
Show all A check box that you select to indicate to the system that all letters should be displayed, no matter dates specified and what kind of processing they require, printing, emailing, or other.
Start date The date that starts the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
End date The date that ends the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included into the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data.
Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Final reminder A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter is a final reminder. In this case, the customer account for which such letter was prepared can be selected in the Manage credit holds (AR523000) window, so you can put this account on credit hold.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be emailed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been emailed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print statements (AR503500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500 page You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print statements (AR503500) You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. Also, you can view unprocessed statements or already-processed statements. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements you have included (by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table) for the selected cycle.
Process all Initiates processing of all statements (listed in the window) of the selected cycle.
Inquiries

List of inquiries you can navigate to from this window:

## The top part Here, you can specify selection criteria to narrow the statements displayed in the table. Statements were prepared in the format required for printing or sending by email (or both), as specified for each customer or customer class, and can be either sent by email or printed for mailing.
Element Description
Actions

The action to be applied to the statements selected for processing:

Print statement
Select this action to print statements prepared for printing.
Email statement
Select this action to generate emails for statements in accordance with the STATEMENT mailing settings.
Mark as: do not email
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring emailing.
Mark as: do not print
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring printing.
Regenerate statement
Select this action to regenerate and prepare the most recent customer statements.
Statement cycle A statement cycle whose statements will be processed.
Statement date The date of the statements.
Branch The branch for which you want to view statements.
Foreign currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that foreign currency statements should be included in processing.
Show all A check box that indicates (if selected) that all statements (processed or not) will be displayed in the table.
Message In this field, you can write a free-form message connected with the statement.
## The table This table displays the statements matching the criteria defined in the top part. You can use the unlabelled check boxes to select statements for processing.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Statement balance The balance of the customer’s statement in the base currency.
Overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the base currency.
Currency The currency of the statement.
FC statement balance The balance of the statement in the foreign currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the foreign currency.
FC statement balance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement is in the foreign currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to print the statement in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to email the statement to the customer in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been emailed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process incoming payments (AR305000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process incoming payments (AR305000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Match incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-incoming-payments/) + [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/) + [Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents/) + [Process matched incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Status description Click this to open a dialogue box that shows you the statuses of the active document, such as “Remaining balance available”.
Match automatically

When you click this, the system tries to match the imported incoming payments with the customer ledger invoices in the system. The matching is based on payment reference and/or invoice numbers.

For payments that the system has matched automatically, you see that the Ready to process check box is selected. These are now ready for processing.

Process

Initiates the processing of transactions with the Ready to process check box selected. The processing takes place on all lines that are ready for processing, regardless of any filters set on the table.

After processing, in the first column, a Success or icon-error is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. You can hover over the icon to read the line-specific message. Successfully processed lines do not show up again for the selected cash account.

Setting for matching

In the Settings for matching dialog box, you can temporarily change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation.

The settings you make here disappear when you leave the window.

### The Settings for matching dialog box In this dialog box, you can specify preferences for matching and relevance calculation. By default, the system uses the values specified on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. These values remain effective during your session unless you specify new values. #### The Disbursement date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of a cash management transaction (disbursement) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Allow matching to credit note

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match the receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to the purchase invoices.

If the check box is cleared (the default value), the receipt bank transactions are always matched to the purchase invoices.

#### The Receipt date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of cash management transaction (receipt) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.

#### The Weights for relevance calculation section
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching

A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is considered as matching to a cash transaction with an empty reference number.

If this check box is cleared (the default value), transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.

Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
#### The Date range for relevance calculation section
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
Skip voided transactions during matching A check box that you select to make the system skip voided transactions during the reconciliation process.
Save and close (button) By clicking this button it saves the settings during your working session and closes the dialog box.
## The top part
Element Description
Cash account If you do not use a default account or want to match payments from a different account, select the account in the Cash account field. The system displays all imported payments for that account in the table.
Display only relevant matches Invoices matching the criteria set up in the Settings for matching dialog box are automatically displayed and matched on the relevance factor. If you do not want to display invoices with 0 match relevance, select the Display only relevant matches check box.
## The table
Button Description
Unmatch Click this to unmatch the selected match.
Unmatch all Click this to unmatch all matches that have been done this time.
Hide selected

Click this to hide the transactions that are selected in the Hide column from the table. This undoes all changes to the selected transactions and marks them as processed.

To be able to view and process a hidden transaction again, select the transaction in the Import incoming payments (AR305500) window and click Unhide transaction.

Undo split

Click this to undo the splitting of the selected split line.

If you have processed one or more of the split lines, you will not be able to undo the split on the not processed lines.

Column Description
Ready to process A check box that, if selected, indicates to the system that this transaction is ready to be processed. Namely, the transaction has been matched to the transaction in the system or details of a new document (to match this transaction) were specified.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Receipt The amount of the incoming payment.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Hide A check box which you can select for each transaction you want to hide. After you have made your selection, click the Hide selected button.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Customer/Supplier no The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The identifier of the entry type that was used to create a document to match the transaction.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid. The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates. This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the invoice.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. entry date The entry date of the transaction.
## Right pane: Match to payment tab The tab provides a list of payments that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the payments that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. For the matching document you choose among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Trans. type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Orig. doc. number The ID of the document, as assigned by the corresponding numbering series.
Document ref. The number of the corresponding external document, if one exists.
Description A detailed description of the document.
Doc. date The date of the transaction or document.
Post period The post period of the payment.
Incoming payment The document amount or transaction amount if it is a receipt.
Disbursement The document amount or transaction amount if it is a disbursement.
## Right pane: The Match to invoice tab The tab provides a list of invoices that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the invoices that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. If you choose a matching document among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Element Description
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Location The business account location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method associated with the document.
Account no. The account to which the payment has been made.
Update bank account

You can update the IBAN/BBAN from the imported bank payment line.

In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window under Bank statement settings, select the check box Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions. When the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done.

If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the button Update bank account will appear. If you click the button the customer/supplier is updated with the account from the bank.

### The table
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoice has been released.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Ext. ref. no The supplier’s reference number.
Doc. date The date of the document.
Amount The document amount.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.
Description The invoice text provided for the document.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

## Right pane: The Create document tab By using this tab, for payments with no match, you can create new documents of the type determined by the workspace of origin and the type of transaction (receipt or disbursement). See also:[Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). ### The top part
Element Description
Create Select this check box to initiate creating a new document for the selected transaction. Clear the check box to delete any information you have specified for the new document.
Clear rule A button that clears the applied rule and the settings the system has configured by using the applied rule.
Create rule

Click this button to navigate to the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window where you can create a new rule, view and modify the details of the rule and save it for future use.

Note

You can define rules to create documents originating in the Cash management workspace only.

Cash account details/ Customer details/ Supplier details

Click this button to open the cash account, supplier ledger or customer ledger window as a pop-up to see the details of the selected document.

The name of the button changes depending on the selected workspace. In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab, you can define which window will be opened for the different workspaces.

If no window has been selected, the following windows will be opened:

  • Cash management opens the Cash account details (CA303000) window with the active cash account selected.
  • Supplier ledger opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the selected supplier selected. If the supplier number is empty, the window opens without a supplier selected.
  • Customer ledger opens the Customer details (AR402000) window with the selected customer selected. If the customer number is empty, the window opens without a customer selected.
Workspace

The workspace where the document originated.

Select one of the following workspaces:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Cash management
Entry type ID

The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected transaction.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

VAT zone

Change or specify the VAT zone or VAT category that applies to the transaction if necessary.

The VAT calculation mode is set to Gross by the system, and the VAT category field is updated with the default value when the VAT zone is selected.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

VAT calculation mode This field has a read-only value that always shows Gross.
Trans. descr. The description of the selected transaction that can be modified. These changes affect the description in the new document only; the description of the imported bank transaction or incoming payment remains unchanged (the table in the left pane).
Customer/Supplier no.

The ID and name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Location

The location of the supplier or customer.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Payment method

The payment method used by the customer or supplier for the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Invoice no.

The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.

The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Total amount The total amount of the document.
Amount used

The amount of the transaction for which the documents

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

Remaining balance

The balance of the transaction for which you can add the documents.

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.

Application amount

The amount of the application for this payment.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Unapplied balance

The unapplied balance of the document.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Write-off amount

The total amount of write-offs specified for documents to be applied.

This field is displayed if the Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Split

(button)

Click this button to split the selected line in the left table into different lines. The button only appears when there is a remaining amount to match. To read more about this functionality, go to Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents.

If the Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer check box is selected on the Incoming payments settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, payments will be automatically split on incoming payments import.

Allow unapplied balance Select this check box to process payments in situations where you need to overrule the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied. This check box is available only if the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied is selected in the Bank statement settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window and the unapplied balance is different from 0.
### The table for documents that originated in the Cash management workspace In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to split the transaction amount. You cannot add documents that originated in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.
Column Description
Branch

The branch that created the document.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Description The description of the document. By default, this is the description in the Trans. descr. field in the top part of this tab, and you can edit it.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
Price The price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all items.
Offset cash account

The cash account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset cash account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

The field is displayed if the selected entry type is used for payments reclassification.

Offset account

The account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

Description A description of the account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item used as a transaction subject.
VAT category The default value is based upon what you selected in the VAT zone field.
Non-invoiceable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document line is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace

Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the non-project code indicating that this document is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.

Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

The column is available if the Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.

### The table for documents that originated in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to apply the new payment. You cannot add documents that originated in the Cash management workspace.
Button Description
Select documents

By clicking the button, the Select documents pop-up window appears. Here you can select multiple documents using the date and branch filters on the top and the Select all documents option.

You need to select a Customer/Supplier no. in the top part of this tab for documents to be displayed in this pop-up window.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.

Load documents

By clicking the button, the customer or the supplier documents will load in the table, until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part, starting with the oldest documents.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.

#### The Select documents pop-up window This pop-up window appears when you have clicked the **Select documents** button. Here you select Supplier ledger or Customer ledger documents that you want to apply to the respective incoming payment. ##### The top part
Element Description
Up to due date The last due date up to which you want to filter the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.

Currency The cash account’s currency.
Total amount The total amount of the transaction selected in the main window.
Application amount

The total value of the selected documents.

This amount is always less than or equal to the Total amount.

Unapplied balance The difference between Total amount and Application amount.
Trans. descr. The transaction description of the transaction selected in the main window.
##### The table
Button Description
Select all documents Click this to select all documents until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part.
Column Description
Select document Check box for selecting the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.

Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
Due date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document is due to be paid.
Amount in cash account currency The document amount converted in the cash account’s currency.
Balance in cash account currency The document balance converted in the cash account’s currency.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier number from the customer/supplier document.
Description The description from the supplier or customer documents.
Amount The document amount paid in the original currency.
Balance The document balance amount in the original currency.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order/supplier ref. The document’s original customer order/supplier reference as assigned by the customer/supplier (for informational purposes).
External reference/buyer’s order no. The external reference number/buyer’s order number of the transaction.
Customer name/supplier name The customer name/supplier name associated with the document.
Location The customer or supplier location.
#### The table
Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
Customer name The customer name associated with the document.
Customer

The parent or child customer associated with the document, by its customer number.

The Parent-child customer relationship can be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

For more information about parent-child relationship, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview

Invoice text The text from the customer documents.
External ref. The external reference number of the transaction.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document.
Balance The amount of the document after the specified amount was paid.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Cash discount balance The unused amount of the available discount, if any.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment.
Cross rate

A cross rate that you can optionally modify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.

The column is hidden by default and available if the Multi-currency accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Write-off reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off balances. You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.
Description The description from the supplier documents.
Supplier ref. The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).

Related pages

Tasks

Recurring transactions (AR203500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500 page You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (AR203500) You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. You create a schedule and add one document or multiple documents of the following types to this schedule: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**. You can also add documents to an existing schedule or schedules. Only the documents with the **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** statuses can be scheduled. Once you assign a document to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. A schedule defines how often and how many times generation of the assigned documents should repeat. The system uses the original documents as templates to generate similar documents with transaction dates and some other details changed. In this window, you can also view the details of the active and completed schedules. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run now Initiates the process of running a schedule and generating documents according to the schedule.
## The top part Here, you can create a new schedule and edit or delete any of the existing schedules.
Element Description
Schedule ID

The ID of the schedule.

A new schedule gets its unique identifier in accordance with the number series assigned to schedules in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date A date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires. This field is unavailable if the Never expire check box is selected.
Never expires A check box that indicates (if selected) that no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit option is selected.
No limit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule should be continued into future financial periods indefinitely; when you select this check box, the Execution limit field becomes unavailable.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the documents were last generated. If no documents have been generated according to the schedule, the box is unavailable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times)

A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed or how many times the documents were generated.

A 0 here indicates that the schedule has not been executed yet and no documents have been generated.

Schedule type

The frequency at which documents should be generated. Click one of the following option buttons, which are described in detail in the next sections:

Daily
The documents should be generated daily or every x days.
Weekly
The documents should be generated once a week or once every x weeks.
Monthly
The documents should be generated once per month or once every x months.
By financial period
The documents will be generated only once per financial period or once every x financial periods.

Select the schedule type, and enter the settings specific to the type in the corresponding section (described below).

### The Daily section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in days) when the document is generated. For example: 1 means every day and 2 means every other day, starting on the Start date
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in weeks) when the document is generated. You can also select the day of the week when the document is generated.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the time period (in months) for document generation.

For example: A 3 here would generate documents every three months.

For this schedule type, you should enter an integer and select one of the option buttons below this field.

On day

An option button that you select if you want to select a particular day of the month.

If you select this button, you should select the day of the month for the invoice in the adjacent field.

On the

An option button that you can select if you want to select a particular day of the week within the month.

If you select this button, you should also select the ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and the day of the week in the right field. For example: 2nd Thursday.

### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the interval for document generation, measured in financial periods.

In addition to selecting this integer, you should select one of the following option buttons, which determine when documents should be generated.

Start of the financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of period An option button that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period

An option button that you use if documents should be generated on a particular day of the financial period.

If you select this button, select the particular day in the field.

## The Document list tab On the **Document list** tab, you can assign one document or multiple documents to the schedule. You can select documents from the list of those with a status of **Balanced**. Other columns in the row display the selected document's details.
Column Description
Type The type of the customer ledger document. Documents of the following types may be scheduled: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The ID number of the original document, which is used as a template to generate documents. Other columns in the row are read-only and display the details of the original document.
Customer The ID of the customer whose document is being scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-defined description of the document.
## The Generated documents tab This tab contains a table showing the documents that have been generated as a result of this schedule being run.
Column Description
Type The document type, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document.
Customer The customer whose document was scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name, as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the generated document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the generated transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the generated document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The description of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Release customer documents (AR501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000 page This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release customer documents (AR501000) This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released (**Balanced**) documents or only selected ones. Whether documents will be posted automatically when they are released is defined by the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the customer ledger documents you have selected in the table, changes their status to Open, and creates unposted batches or posts batches directly to the General ledger, depending on whether the Automatically post on release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Release all Releases all the customer ledger documents on the list at once and changes their status to Open. Whether transactions are directly posted on release is defined by the Automatically post on release check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table The table contains all ready-to-be-released customer ledger documents and payments (those with a status of **Balanced**). To include a document, select the check box that precedes it. To select all the documents, select the check box in the column header.
Column Description
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be released:

Invoice
An invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided
Debit note
A document that adjusts the debit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Credit note
A document that adjusts the credit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Payment
A customer payment
Voided payment
A payment that has been cancelled
Prepayment
A customer payment
Customer refund
A document created for a customer refund
Voided refund
A refund has been voided
Overdue charge
A document for overdue charges
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that will not be paid.
Credit write-off
A document created for a customer refund
Cash sale
A document created to record a sale paid immediately by cash
Cash return
A document that is used to record a return of sold goods, which is refunded immediately by cash refund. The system also creates a document of this type when you reverse a cash-sale. Cash returns do not affect the customer’s balance.
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. Clicking the link navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000), Customer payments (AR302000), or Cash sales (AR304000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer (by ID) referred to on this document.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it should appear on the documents.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Status The status of the document. Only Balanced documents can be released.
Date The date when the document was created.
Post period The period to which the transactions of the document should be posted.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-provided description for the document.
Branch The ID of the branch.
Branch name The name of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Renew contracts (CT502000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000 page You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Renew contracts (CT502000) You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates the renewal of the contracts you have selected in the Contract column.
Process all Initiates the renewal of all the listed contracts at once.
## The top part Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts to be listed in the table (and possibly included in the renewal process). You can select contracts by a customer class, a contract template, and the date range in which they will expire.
Element Description
Renewal date The start date of the date range in which the contracts will expire.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which contracts will be listed. Leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Contract template The contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to view information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria you chose in the selection area. You can select any listed contract and view its details before renewing it. To select some of the contracts for renewal, select the corresponding check boxes and click **Process**. To renew all the listed contracts, click **Process all**.
Column Description
Contract The contract ID.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract. Use one of the following options: Renewable or Expiring.
Customer no. The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The setup date of the contract.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Last invoicing date The most recent invoicing date for the contract.
Next invoicing date The next invoicing date for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Report texts (AR20200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s page You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report texts (AR20200S) You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Report text code

The code of the report text, max. 30 characters. The field is alphanumeric.

Example: RE1.

Name

The name of the report text code.

Example: Reminder 1.

Text fields

In the topmost text field, enter the desired text of your reminder or dunning letter.

In the second text field, you can for en example add a message to the customer.

You can use maximum 255 characters in these fields.

Related pages

Tasks

Run contract invoicing (CT501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000 page You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run contract invoicing (CT501000) You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. Invoices are generated for each contract and for each customer involved. For details on the settings and methods used in contract invoicing, see: Contract invoicing. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates invoicing processing for the contracts that you have included by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates invoicing processing for all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to configure the criteria for selecting contracts that you may want to invoice.
Element Description
Invoicing date The date that determines the contracts to be shown; contracts with a next invoicing date that is before or on the date you have selected here are to be displayed. The selected date serves as the invoice date for contracts with the invoicing period set to On demand.
Contract template The contract template that the contracts to be listed were based on. Leave the field blank to view contracts based on all templates.
Customer class The customer class of the contracts to be listed. Leave the field blank to view the contracts of customers of all classes.
Customer The customer whose contracts you want to invoice. Leave the field blank to see the contracts of all customers of the class (or all customers of all classes).
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria specified in the top part. Only contracts with at least one not yet invoiced (but completed) invoicing period are displayed. If multiple invoicing periods were not invoiced for the contract, you should run the invoicing process once for each not yet invoiced period. You can select contracts by using the check boxes in the first column.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract identifier.
Description A description of the contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Last invoicing date The date when the contract was last invoiced.
Next invoicing date The date when the contract is to be invoiced next time.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Contract template The contract template that the contract is based on.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales invoices (AR301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000 section You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices (AR301000) You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. For more information, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/) + [Change customer or customer location on sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-invoice/) + [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/) + [Correct a released sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/) + [Reverse an invoice with ROT or RUT](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice-with-rot-or-rut/) + [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/) + [Poll the invoice status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status/) + [Preview an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/preview-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice from preview in a report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-from-preview-in-a-report/) + [Email an invoice or a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-or-a-credit-note/) + [Print an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice/) + [Send an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice to an unregistered contact](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-to-an-unregistered-contact/) + [Override an email address](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/override-an-email-address/) + [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) + [Correct a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-sales-invoice/) + [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) + [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the document.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Reverse and apply to note: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer and applies it to the invoice. For invoices with items connected to excise duties, including invoices with an Excise duty total of 0, you can not use this action. For instructions on how to reverse these invoices, see Reverse an invoice with excise duty.

  • Email invoice/note: Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing. For details on setting up mailings, see: About mailings for customers.

  • Send email: Opens the Send (CR306015) window, which you can use to create an email.

  • Enter payment/apply note: Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window with the elements filled in with the customer information and with the invoice amount specified as the document amount. This action is only available if the document has a status of Open.

  • Reclassify general ledger batch: Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can initiate the reclassification process. For details, see: About reclassifying general ledger transactions.

  • Reverse: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer.

  • Write-off: Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.

  • Add to schedule: Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, which you use to assign the document to a schedule.

  • Mark as: do not email: Selects the Do not email check box for the document.

  • Recalculate prices: Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Will send the invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the AutoInvoice status and Business level status under the AutoInvoice section of the Invoice address tab.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice: Awaiting processing.
    • Pending: Awaiting delivery.
    • Sent: The invoice is sent.
    • Error: To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.

+

Generate e-Invoice XML draft:

Generates a draft version of the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 XML, so that you have the possibility to check the content and validate that all settings are correct, before you start using the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format for electronic invoicing. It is also possible to use this action after you have sent the invoice to AutoInvoice.

The action can be used on all statuses except On hold , and becomes available if PEPPOL BIS 3.0 is activated and you have enabled the setting Send to AutoInvoice on the Invoice address tab.

Note

** The generated file is a draft and may not be used as a legal document.

Correct invoice
When using the Correct invoice feature, the system will automatically create a copy of the original invoice that you can further edit. When releasing this new invoice, the system will automatically create a sales credit note for the original invoice and match it against the chosen invoice to be corrected. The original invoice will remain in status Open until the new corrected document will be finally released, but will no further be included in the payment process. Correcting of invoices with lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) windows is currently not supported.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry forms:

Customer details
Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window.
Sales invoice
Navigates to the Customer invoices (SO303000) window.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) window.
View proforma:
Navigates to the Pro forma invoices (PM307000) window. This menu command is available only if the invoice has originated from a proforma invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you click for fast access to the following reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Unreleased transactions
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Preview invoice/note
Navigates to a preview of the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print overdue charge
Navigates to the Overdue charge (AR643000) report.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options for updating prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are calculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines of the document.
Current line:
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line of the document.
Set current unit prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price or Manual amount columns) with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.

After the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.

Recalculate discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Override manual line discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part Here you can create a new document or select an existing customer ledger document for modification. The following table summarises the elements of this area.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Invoice
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided.
Debit note
A document that adjusts the amount in previous undercharging invoices.
Credit note
A document that credits a customer for damaged goods or a previous overcharging invoice.
Overdue charge
A document that lists overdue charges to be paid on an outstanding document that is past due. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Credit write-off
A document that writes off a small credit of the customer.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the customer ledger document in the system; for a new document, the <NEW> string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
You can edit the document but cannot release it.
Pending print
You can edit the document but should print the document before releasing it. After the document is printed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note printing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Pending email
You can edit the document, but should send the document by email before releasing it. After the document is emailed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note emailing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Send invoices by email check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT amount value equals the Balance value. The document may be released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Scheduled
The document is attached to a schedule. Scheduled documents are used as templates for generating similar documents, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. A document can be scheduled if its status is Balanced, or Pending print, or Pending email.
Voided
The document is no longer used for generating recurring transactions. The system changes the document status from Scheduled to Voided when a user has removed the document from the table on the Document list tab of the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window.
Open
The document has been released and cannot be edited. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document, which had been open, is equal to zero.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft.

A document with the On hold status may be edited and cannot be released.

Date

The date when the customer ledger document was created.

By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but you can change the date.

Post period

The period to which the document should be posted.

By default, it is the current period, but you can change the period. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.

Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
External ref. The external reference used in AutoInvoice.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module.

Invoice text Any user-provided description of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer associated with the document. When the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) and a child customer is selected in the child field first, the corresponding parent account is automatically populated in this field.
Child This field is only displayed when the functionality Paren-child customer relationship is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)
Consolidate Invoices

When this check box is selected, invoices for the current child customer will be sent to the parent account. This overrides the information and settings in the Invoice address and Invoice contact sections.

The following invoice information is retrieved from the parent when this check box is selected:

  • Invoice contact,
  • Invoice address,
  • Payment terms,
  • Payment method.

This element is disabled if the displayed account is a parent account.

Location

The location of the customer related to the document.

By default, it is the default location of the selected customer.

Contact The contact associated with the customer.
Currency

The currency of the document.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency, but it can be changed if the Enable currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.

View base (button)

When you click View base the following happens:

  • All amounts will be converted to your base currency.
  • In the Currency column, the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency again to return to the original view.

Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the payment terms.
Detail total The document total, which the system calculates for all line items in the Document details tab.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document.

This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT.

The VAT taxable amount is displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window.

If the check box is cleared, this field is empty.

This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT.

This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window. This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The VAT amount of the document, as defined on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken. For a document used in the application process, this is the balance after the payments were applied.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original amount and the rounded amount.

The field only appears if the Invoice rounding functionality is activated.

For details, see: Set up document amount rounding.

Amount

The amount paid by the document.

The field appears for new documents if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. If the check box is cleared, then the field appears when the document status is Open.

Cash discount

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms.

If a document has the On hold or Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and tax amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID

The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency rate type, but it can be changed if the Enable rate override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents

View the currency conversion.

Note

It’s possible to change the currency rate for an individual invoice here without changing the currency rate type, but the currency rate will restore back to original if this invoice is corrected. Therefore, it’s recommended to create a new currency rate instead, which can then be applied to the individual invoice ( See also: Add a currency rate ).

OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document (invoice or note) or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Element Description
Branch The branch that sells the item or provides the service.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable.
Transaction descr. Any comments relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of this item sold to the customer, expressed in the unit of measure specified in the UoM column.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price

The unit price set for the item or service.

If you want to update the unit price automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the unit price and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.

Manual amount

The manual amount, which is either the unit price multiplied by the quantity or a manually entered amount that may not be equal to the product of the unit price and the quantity.

If you want to update the manual amount automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price multiplied by the item quantity), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the manual amount once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.

Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the discount amount after you have entered the percent manually and saved your changes or added a new line.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the line amount after you have entered the discount amount manually and save your changes or added a new line.

Amount

The amount after the discount has been applied.

The value of this read-only field is calculated automatically by deducting the discount amount from the manual amount.

Manual discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually.

If you clear the check box, the system clears entered discount percent, or discount amount, or selected discount code.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically or manually.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also:About suggested sales accounts.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used to record this sale transaction.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated.

This column appears if the integration of the Projects module with Customer ledger has been enabled. That is, the Customer ledger check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Salesperson ID The ID of the applicable salesperson.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the document created as a result of reversing an invoice, credit note, or debit note.

The column shows the ID of the deferral schedule associated with the reversed document.

Note

If a credit note document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the reversed documents, this column remains empty.

Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line.

Upon release of the document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based on the settings defined in this deferral code.

You can change the deferral code in this field manually if needed.

Note

If you change an MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item to not be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based on the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.

Term start date

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Term end date

The date when the process of the deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT category

The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. See also:About suggested VAT categories.

By default, it is the VAT category defined for the non-stock or stock item specified in the line; otherwise, the VAT category is the default VAT category of the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.

Commissionable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount.

The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

RUT or ROT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a ROT or RUT deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.

Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
Start date Sets the start date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The Start date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
End date Sets the end date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The End date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
Order no. The order number retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Shipment no. The shipment number retrieved from the accordant confirmed shipment, if applicable.
Order type The order type retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Base qty The quantity of the item sold to the customer, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UoM is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Disc. unit price The unit price after the discount percent has been applied.
Discount series

The ID of the discount series that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Expense date The date of the corresponding expense claim.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Line no. The number of the item line on the invoice.
Manual price

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unit price in this line has been corrected or specified manually.

The system automatically selects this check box for the line when you change the price in the Unit price column. If the check box is selected, when you change the unit of measure or quantity in the line, the unit price is not automatically refreshed with the price from the price list.

If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).

Order line no. The number of the item line on the corresponding order.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the document and the customer's VAT zone. For a released customer ledger document, it also contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions when the batch is posted.
Branch The branch with which this invoice or note is associated.
Customer ledger account The liability account specified as the customer ledger account for the selected location of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document If a credit note is currently selected in the top part of this window, this is the identifier of the document that was reversed with the credit note. If you click the link in this box, the current window opens with the details of the reversed document.
### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment method The payment method that the customer will use to pay the document.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment ref. no The reference number of the payment.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate overdue charges for this document. Clear the check box to exclude the document from the process of overdue charges being applied.

The check box is displayed after the document is released if the Apply overdue charges check box is selected for the selected customer in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Payment message Here you can enter a short message of alphanumeric characters.
### The VAT information section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone

The Customer VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.

If no VAT zone is specified for the customer location, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

You can override the default value.

### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
### The Invoice period dates section
Element Description
Start date The start date of the invoice period
End date The end date of the invoice period
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
### The Dunning info section This section is only available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Dunning letter date The date of the last released dunning letter in which the document was listed.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Revoked

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is excluded from the dunning process. Clear the check box if you want the system to process the document when you prepare dunning letters.

The field is displayed if the By document option is selected in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

### The Debt collection information section This section is only available if you have a **Case number** entered. functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Case number The case number from debt collection for the invoice.
Case type

The case type from debt collection for the invoice. Collection notification

  • Collection
  • Payment notification
  • Legal collection
Case status

The case status from debt collection for the invoice.

  • Active
  • Paused
  • Closed, not paid
  • Closed and paid
Exclude from debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the invoice from being sent to debt collection. This check box is inherited from the window Customers (AR303000). The check box will not be visible if the invoice has been sent to dept collection. This section will display information when you receive the case number from the debt collection.
### The Cash discount information section This section is only available if the document contains at least one tax that has the **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window and if the document has a non-zero cash discount amount. The elements in this section display the calculated amounts if the document is paid during the cash discount period and a cash discount is applied to the document.
Element Description
Discounted doc. total The document total, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied; this occurs when the document has been paid within the cash discount period.
Discounted taxable total The taxable amount, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied to the document.
VAT on discounted price The VAT amount, which is calculated based on the price to which the cash discount has been applied.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoicing address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. The **Override address** and **Override contact** check boxes on this tab are selected by default if the **Invoice to default location** check box is not selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Delivery settings** tab, for this customer. ### The Address section
Element Description
Override address

A check box you select to specify an invoice address other than the default invoice address of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the invoice address to be used for this customer is the same as the default invoice address of the customer.

Address 1 The first line of the invoice address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoice address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoice address.
Postcode

The postcode for the invoicing address.

An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.

City The city of the customer’s invoice address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Contact information section
Element Description
Override contact

A check box you select to specify contact info other than the default contact information of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the contact info to be used for this customer is the same as the default contact information of the customer.

Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print

A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included in the list of documents available for mass-printing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Print invoices check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Do not email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included into the list of documents available for mass-emailing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Send invoices by email check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.

### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the text in the Invoice text field on the invoice, and, if applicable, the sales order confirmation.
Print note on external sales documents Select this check box to print a note on external sales documents.
Print note on internal sales documents Select this check box to print a note on internal sales documents.
### The AutoInvoice section In this tab you find the AutoInvoice sending information. Here, you also find the invoice response message, if you have activated this functionality in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, and the customer has activated this from their side. For more information, see: [About invoice response messages](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages/).
Element Description
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sending method Indicates which path the AutoInvoice was sent by: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice status

Shows the status of processing. Available statuses are:

Sent to AutoInvoice
Awaiting processing.
Pending
Awaiting delivery.
Sent
The invoice is sent.
Error
To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice sent by

Shows how the invoice was sent. Possible values are:

  • Sent inside home network
  • Sent by email
  • Sent by print
  • Sent by print PRIORITY
  • Sent by print WORLD
  • Sent e-Invoice
  • Sent to bank network
  • Sent by N/A
Business level status

The status of the invoice as sent by the customer. It can be one of the following:

  • Message acknowledgment
  • In process
  • Under query
  • Conditionally accepted
  • Rejected
  • Accepted
  • Paid

To get the current status, click the Actions button and select Poll invoice status.

Reason code The reason given by the customer to clarify the business level status. This text is predefined, see this status clarification reason list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible reason codes.
Reason Text entered manually by the customer.
Action code The action the customer wants you to take for this invoice. This text is predefined, see this status clarification action list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible action codes.
Action Text entered manually by the customer.
### The Direct debit information section
Element Description
Mandate ID Shows the direct debit information from the Direct debit tab of the Customers (AR303000) window. The selected mandate is the default one for the branch selected on the Financial details tab of the invoice. The list will display only mandates linked to current branch or mandates without a branch set.
Sent to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoPay.
Send to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be send to AutoPay.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the VAT to be paid on the invoice. The table is filled out automatically for the invoice or note when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID in clear language.
VAT rate The rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. To calculate commissions, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Default salesperson The ID of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line. By default, it is a salesperson associated with the selected location of the customer.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that were applied to the document. The **Line**-level discounts applied to the document (if any) are shown on the **Document details** tab. This tab is only available if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the document. Selecting the check box updates the total and the line amounts of the document but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the table.
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually. The discount was selected from the Group- or Document- level discounts for which the Manual check box is selected in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
Order type The type of order.
Order no. The order number.
## The Applications tab The content of this tab depends on the type of the document selected in the top part. If a document with the **Invoice**, **Debit note**, or **Overdue charge** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, this tab displays the list of customer ledger payments that have been applied to the document. For invoices and debit notes with the **Balanced** status, the tab displays the list of open payments or credit notes (if any) that can be applied to the document. You can specify the exact amount to be paid with each document or click the **Apply automatically** button in the table toolbar to let the system to decide how to pay the invoice. The specified applications are applied when you release the invoice. If a document with the **Credit note** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, the tab displays the list of customer ledger invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges the selected credit note is applied to. For credit notes with the **Balanced** status, you can specify invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges to which this credit note is applied when you release it. You add documents for application by adding a row to the table and selecting the document type and reference number. The system automatically fills in the **Amount paid** field with the possible value, but you can change this value for each added document. The specified applications are applied when you release the credit note.
Button Description
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can view the document details or application, depending on the document type.
Apply automatically

Automatically applies the available payments to the document.

The button is displayed if the Invoice type is selected in the top part.

### If you select Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the document. When you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window opens in a pop-up window, depending on the document type, so that you can view the document details.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount that was deducted from the invoice amount in case the invoice was paid during the cash discount period.
Payment date The date of the payment application.
Balance The balance of the document after the payment was applied.
Invoice text The description of the payment document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Payment period The period to which the payment transactions are posted.
Payment ref. The reference number used by the customer on its payment document.
Status The status of the payment document.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.

### If you select Credit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Document type The type of the document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the applied document. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Date The date of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after the credit note was applied.
Invoice text The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.

### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
## The Attachments tab
Button Description
View file Opens the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
Column Description
Send the file to AutoInvoice The selected files will be attached to the invoice.
Name The name of the attachment.
Created by The person who added the attachment.
Creation time The date and time the attachment was created.
Comment Shows the comment that you can enter in the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
File size The size of the attached file.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales prices (AR202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000 page You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales prices (AR202000) You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. Changes made here become effective immediately. Also, with one click, you can create a price worksheet containing all prices for items matching the selected criteria. For more information on sales prices, see: [Managing sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create price worksheet

Navigates to the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, where you proceed working with a price worksheet containing all price records matching the criteria that you have selected in the current window. By default, the new worksheet is created with the On hold status and the current business date.

Note

If the selection of records contains multiple records defined for the same item, but effective on different dates, the system forces you to specify particular date in the Effective as of field to eliminate duplicates (all records in the worksheet are to be effective on the same date.)

## The top part In this part, you can select sales prices for viewing and possibly revising by their price type, item, and effective date. You can display only the prices of items assigned to your work group (or another specific work group), or you can display only the prices of the items assigned to you.
Element Description
Price type

The type of prices you want to view. Select one of the following options:

All prices
Prices of all available types are displayed.
Base
Prices of the base type are displayed. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Customer-specific prices are displayed. You can select a particular customer account in the Price code field to create a price list for this customer or to narrow the list of prices.
Customer price class
Prices specific to the price classes are displayed. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price list for all customers from this price class or to narrow the list of prices. For an item, you can set different prices for different customer price classes, which can be created and modified in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window.
Price code/Customer The customer or a customer price class for which you want to create or edit a price list. This field is available if the Customer or the Customer price class option is selected in the Price type field.
Effective as of A date that you select to view or edit prices effective on this exact date.
Item class ID The class of stock or non-stock items, by its ID, for which you want to review sales price information. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all item classes.
Item ID The item for which you want to view or edit prices.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Price class The item price class of the items for which you want to review sales price information. You can leave the field blank to view information on items in all item price classes.
Price manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the price manager whose items you want to view:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another username to view the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to view items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Price work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to view:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Clear the My check box and select a price work group in the unlabelled field to display the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all price work groups.
## The Sales prices table This table displays the sales prices for items that match the criteria you have specified. You can view and edit the existing items and add new records.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code/Customer Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Price code description Depending on the price type, the price code description is the customer name or customer price class description.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Promotion A check box that indicates (if selected) that the price for this item is promotional. Promotional prices, which may overlap with regular prices, should have expiration dates after which they are not used.
Break qty.

The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with the specific price.

This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Price

The price for the item, which becomes effective immediately after you save your changes in this window. You can set any price as long as minimum markup validation is not configured for the Inventory workspace, which is the case when the No validation option is selected in the Validate min. markup field in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.

If minimal mark up validation is configured (that is, if the Warning or Set to minimum option is selected in the Validate min. markup field) and you enter a pending price lower than that allowed by the Min. markup % value for the item, you will get a warning or the pending price will be set to the minimum allowed.

The Min. markup % for the item is specified on the Price/cost information tab in the Stock items (IN202500) window or the similarly named tab in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT

The VAT amount that is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar VATs are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of VATs that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price.

For details, see: Sales price calculation.

Effective date The date when the price became effective.
Expiration date The date when the price expires.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the item. You can upload prices in worksheets with alternative item IDs instead of item identifiers defined in the system, and to create alternative item IDs for stock items on release of worksheets.

To enable alternative item IDs, select the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales price worksheets (AR202010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010 page You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales price worksheets (AR202010) You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. By using a worksheet, you can make changes to prices in a batch. Prices defined in a worksheet update sales prices when you release the worksheet; before you release it, you can save the changes. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the **Effective date** field. Also, you can create a worksheet with promotional prices and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can use a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using the price basis you specify. For more information on sales prices, see: [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). You can populate a worksheet by manually adding new rows, uploading prices from an Excel file, using Visma Net import scenarios, and clicking the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Updates sales price records. The release process validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met:

  • Pending prices should be set for all records. If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table.
  • Regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure (UoM), and currency may not overlap in time.
  • Promotional prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time.
Note

Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap each other in time.

## The top part Here, you can select a prices worksheet by its reference number to view its information, or you can create a worksheet.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the worksheet in the system; for a new document, the NEW string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated when you save the document. The number series used is defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the worksheet, which is one of the following:

On hold
Indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it. The Hold check box is selected, and you should clear the check box when you are ready to release the worksheet.
Open
Indicates that the worksheet is ready to be released, but can be edited. The Hold check box is cleared. With the Open status, you can edit price records one by one, but you cannot use the Add item, Copy prices and Calculate pending prices buttons in the table toolbar.
Released
Indicates that the prices defined in the worksheet are added to the sales prices records. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the Effective date field.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the worksheet is a draft. Clear the check box to change the status of a worksheet from On hold to Open.
Description A brief description of the worksheet.
Effective date The date when the prices defined in the worksheet become effective.
Promotional A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices defined in the worksheet are promotional and an expiration date must be specified. With the check box selected, the Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing.
Expiration date The date when promotional prices expire. This field becomes available if the Promotional check box is selected.
Overwrite overlapping prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective dates of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices defined in the worksheet.

Make the check box available by enabling retention of prices:

  1. Go to the Customer ledger preferences window, Price/discount settings tab
  2. Set Retention type to Fixed number of months
  3. Make sure the Promotional check box is cleared

Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing if:

  • the retention of prices is disabled
  • the Promotional check box is selected
## The Sales prices worksheet table This table displays the sales prices of items in the selected worksheet. You can view the existing items, upload the listed items with their pricing information, add items from inventory, or copy the existing list to another currency. For all the listed items, you can manually define new pending prices for all units used for the item, or you can direct the system to perform calculation of new pending prices.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Add item to worksheet dialog box so that you can load the list of items from the Inventory workspace.
Copy prices Opens the Copy prices dialog box so that you can copy prices from the selection you specify to a new price worksheet for another customer or customer price class.
Calculate pending prices Opens the Calculate pending prices dialog box so that you can calculate new pending prices or recalculate (update) pending prices by using the selected price basis.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Break qty. The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price. This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Source price The price that serves as a source for calculating pending price of an item. When you add a new record, the value corresponds to the default price of the item, for which you add the record to the worksheet. However, when you are adding records by using the Copy prices dialog box, the value depends on the selection of a source.
Pending price The pending price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you release the worksheet.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT The VAT whose amount is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar taxes are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of taxes that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price. For details, see: About sales price calculation.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the stock or non-stock item for which you want to define the price. The system will search for the stock or non-stock item by the alternative item ID you specify in this column and populate the Item ID, Description, and UoM columns of the row with the settings of the item it finds. If the system does not find the specified alternative ID, when the price worksheet is released, the system will create a global alternative item ID and assign it to the item with the item ID that is specified in this row of the worksheet.

This column is hidden by default and appears if the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box is selected on the Price/discount settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information, see About item cross-references.

## The Add item to worksheet dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add item** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can upload the list of items that match the criteria you have selected, with their default price information from the Inventory workspace. Each added item is assigned the price code and currency you specify in the dialog box.
Element Description
Item The item or items. Start typing in the field, and the system displays the list of items that contain the string you have typed in their identifier or description.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items that you want to add to a worksheet. Leave the field blank to add items of all item classes.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class of the items that you want to add to a worksheet. You can leave the field blank to add items in all item price classes.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the product manager whose items you want to add:

  • Select the Me check box to add the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Deselect the Me check box and select another username to add the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to add items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to add:

  • Select the My check box to add the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Deselect the My check box and select a price work group in the field to add the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and deselect the check box to add the items assigned to all price work groups.
### The Price type to add section
Element Description
Price type

The type of price you want to assign to newly added items. Select one the following options:

Base
The base type is assigned to newly added items. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
The customer-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for this customer.
Customer price class
The price class-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for all customers from this price class.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) for which you want to create a price worksheet.
Currency The currency to be assigned to the prices of newly added items.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The table
Element Description
Item ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items.
Description The description of the stock or non-stock item.
Price class ID The identifier of the item price class.
Price work group The identifier of the price work group.
Price manager The price manager responsible for the pricing policy.
Add (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet. The dialog box stays open so that you can change selection criteria and add more items. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Copy prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can add records to the currently selected worksheet, by copying items that match selection criteria and assigning the specified price code and currency to copied records. If source and destination currencies are different, you specify the type and date of the rate to be used for currency conversion.
Element Description
Price type

The price type of items you want to copy. Select one of the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Items with a customer-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Customer price class
Items with a price class-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) whose items you want to copy.
Source currency The currency of the items you want to copy.
Warehouse The warehouse whose prices should be copied. If this box is empty, the system will copy only the prices that have no warehouse specified. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Effective as of The date that the effective date of the item prices should match.
Promotional price A check box that you select to copy items that have promotional prices.
### The Destination section
Element Description
Price type

The price type you want to assign to copies of items. Select one the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Copies are assigned with a customer-specific price type. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You cannot change the source currency of items when you copy customer-specific prices.
Customer price class
Copies are assigned with a price class-specific price type. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You can also specify a new currency in the Destination currency field.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or a customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) you want to assign to copies of items.
Destination currency The currency to which you want to copy prices. If the source and destination currencies are different, you should specify conversion details in the Currency conversion section.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the copied prices will be assigned. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Currency conversion section
Element Description
Rate type The rate type to be used for currency conversion.
Currency effective date The date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective.
Copy (button) Copies the selected items, adds the copied items to the currently selected worksheet, and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all items added.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Calculate pending prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Calculate pending prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can calculate the new pending prices in the worksheet by using the selected price basis.
Element Description
% of original price The percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. By default, this is 100%, which reflects no change. If you specified 98%, the new prices would be 98% of the price selected as basis.
Decimal places The number of places after the decimal point to be shown for prices.
Update with zero price when basis is zero The check box the indicates, if selected, that the pending price parameter of the price record will be updated with the zero value if the selected price basis for this record is zero.
### The Price basis section
Element Description
Last cost + markup %

An option that you select to calculate prices based on the stock items’ last costs increased by the mark up percentage specified for the items.

Note

The option is not applicable for non-stock items.

Average/standard cost + markup % An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ average/standard costs increased by the markup percentage specified for the stock items. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost.
Source price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the values specified in the Source price column.
List price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the manufacturer’s suggested retail price.
Pending price An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on currently pending prices.
Replacement cost An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on the item’s replacement cost.
Update (button) Updates all pending prices in the currently selected worksheet with the new values.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without updating prices.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Salespersons (AR205000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000 page You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Salespersons (AR205000) You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can create a new salesperson account or select an existing salesperson account for viewing or editing its settings.
Element Description
Salesperson ID

The unique identifier of the salesperson.

Requirements for the ID are set by the SALESPER segmented key.

For more information, see: About ID segmentation.

Is active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the salesperson account is active.
Name The salesperson’s name as it should appear on documents.
Default commission %

The default percent of commission to be used for the salesperson.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Sales sub. The subaccount associated with the salesperson.
## The Customers tab This tab contains a list of the salesperson's customers, and the applicable location and the commission percentage associated with each.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer’s unique identifier. You can select a customer from the list of available customers.
Customer name A read-only column showing the customer’s name as it should appear on the documents.
Location A read-only column with the default location of the customer with whom the salesperson works.
Location name A read-only column that displays the name of the location.
Commission %

The commission percent on sales for the particular customer.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Default When this check box is selected, this salesperson is the default salesperson of the customer.
## The Commission history tab This tab displays the history of commissions for the salesperson. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window and displays the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Commission period The commission period in which the commission was incurred. The commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Commissionable amount The amount used for commission calculation during the period. The commission is calculated on an invoice amount before VAT.
Commission amount The amount of commissions earned during the period.
Payroll processed date

The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module.

This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000 page By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. You specify the branch and the time range for which you want to get data, and the system displays the details of the transactions generated by the system when documents were released within the selected time frame. You can specify additional criteria to narrow the list of transactions. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the branch and the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions, as well as other criteria to determine which transactions are listed.
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date from The starting date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date to The ending date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Completed transactions only A check box that indicates (if selected) that only completed transactions will be displayed. A transaction is considered completed if the inventory issue for the stock item sold in this transaction is released.
Salesperson The identifier and name of the salesperson that was involved in sales for the transactions to be listed. Leave the field blank to view broader range of results.
Item class The item class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all item classes.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customer classes.
Customer The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customers.
## The table This table contains the list of transactions posted during the date range specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the transaction belongs.
Date The date of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Net sale The net sale amount of the sold item.
Cost

A value that is one of the following:

  • If a non-stock item is sold with the transaction, the item’s extended price
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is not completed, the item’s estimated cost
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is completed, the item’s final cost
Margin The difference between the net sale value and the cost.
Margin % A percentage of margin to net sale ratio.
Completed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is completed. That is, the inventory issue for a stock item sold with this transaction is released. If a non-stock item is sold, the transaction could not be completed.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order involved. Click the link to view the details of the sales order.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Type The type of the document whose release triggered the transaction generation (invoice or cash sale).
Item ID The identifier of the sold item.
Item description The description of the sold item.
Customer class The description of the customer class of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer The name of the customer who purchased the item.
Salesperson The name of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.
Branch ID The identifier of the branch.
Customer no. The identifier of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer class ID The identifier of the customer class.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is released.
Item class The item class description to which the sold item is assigned.
Row number The line number in this list.
Item class ID The identifier of the item class.
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.

Related pages

Windows

Statement cycles (AR202800) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800 page You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles (AR202800) You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. You can define four ageing periods for customer ledger documents and use them to prepare a customer ledger ageing schedule at the end of each month. By analysing your customer ledger ageing schedule, you can more easily identify potential cash flow problems. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Regenerate last statement Initiates the process of again generating the most recent statement with an updated date.
## The General settings section
Element Description
Cycle ID The unique identifier of the cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Description A detailed description of the statement cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Schedule type

The day when the statement should be generated. The following options are available:

Weekly:
The statement will be generated each week, on the day specified in the Day of week 1 field.
Twice a month
The statement will be generated twice a month, on the days specified in the Day of month 1 and the Day of month 2 fields.
A fixed day of the month
The statement will be generated on the day specified in the Day of month 1 field.
The end of the month
The statement will be generated on the last day of each month.
The end of the financial period:
The statement will be generated on the last day of each financial period of the current financial year.
Day of month 1 The day of each month when the statement should be generated. The field is available if either Fixed day of the month or Twice a month is selected in the Schedule type field.
Day of month 2 The day of each month when the statement should be generated for the second time. This field is available only if the Twice a month option is selected.
Day of the week The day of each week when the statement should be generated. This field is available only if Weekly is selected in the Schedule type field. The default value is Sunday.
Last statement date A read-only field that displays the date when the statement was generated most recently.
Require payment application before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payments should be applied to invoices before each statement is processed.
Print empty statements If you do not want the statements with no details to be printed, unselect this check box for statement cycles. After the process of preparing the statement, you can view these statements with the Do not print and Do not email check boxes selected in the Statement history details (AR404300), Customer statement history (AR404600), and Print statements (AR503500) window.
## The Ageing section You use this section to define four periods for ageing the customer ledger document. Each period is defined by the following elements.
Element Description
Use financial periods for ageing A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system uses the financial periods as ageing periods in customer statements and customer ledger ageing reports. If this check box is selected, the system uses the financial period to which the statement date or the ageing date belongs as the first ageing period.
Ageing period (days)

In the fields you can select the current period or the number of days the documents to be included overdue.

  • The first period includes documents that are past due or outstanding for the specified number of days or fewer.
  • The second and third periods include documents that are past due or outstanding for the number of days (or fewer) specified in this box and greater than the number of days specified for the previous period.
  • The fourth period includes documents that are more than x days past due or outstanding, where x is the number of days specified for the third period.
Description You can write and edit the descriptions of the defined ageing periods. The descriptions will be printed to the customer statement reports.
Age based on Select whether the age of the documents is based on their due date or document date.
## The Finance charge settings section
Element Description
Apply overdue charges A check box that indicates (if selected) that calculation of overdue charges is required for all customers assigned to the statement cycle.
Require overdue charge calculation before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should calculate overdue charges before processing a statement.
Overdue charge ID The overdue charges to be used for customers assigned to the statement cycle. The overdue charges that are actually applied depend on whether the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected; if not, the charges from the customer class will be applied.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Statement history details (AR404300) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300 page You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history details (AR404300) You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of the statement. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Customer statement history Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window.
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select the statement cycle and the date when the statement was printed.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by its ID.
Statement date The date when the statement was printed.
## The table The table shows the list of customers included in the statement printed on the specified date, along with such details as the balance and the currency used by the customer.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer account in the system.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Statement balance The customer’s balance (in the base currency) on the statement.
Overdue balance The total amount that is overdue.
Currency One of currencies used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
FC statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the multi-currency format of statement should be used.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

Statement history summary (AR404000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000 page In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history summary (AR404000) In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of each statement.
Button Description
Statement history details Navigates to the Statement history details (AR404300) window.
Print statements Navigates to the Print statements (AR503500) report.
## The top part In this part, you can select the statement cycle and the date range for which you want to display data.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which data will be displayed. If you leave the field blank, information for all statement cycles will be displayed.
Include on-demand statements When this is selected, on-demand statements will also be displayed in the summary.
Start date The start date of the date range. By default, it is the start day of the current financial year.
End date The end date of the date range. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table displays the list of statements issued during the specified period of time.
Column Description
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Number of documents The number of documents included into the statement.
To print The number of statements requiring printing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed The number of statements printed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
To email The number of statements requiring emailing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed The number of statements emailed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
No action The number of statements requiring no action in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Email completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been emailed (among all statements to be emailed).
Print completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been printed (among all statements to be printed).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Task (CR306020) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/task-cr306020 page By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Task (CR306020) By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Complete Changes the status of the task to Completed. This action is available only to the task owner.
Complete and follow-up Changes the task status to Completed and creates an task that has the same details as the current one but the Not started status. This action is available only to the task owner.
Cancel Cancels the task, changing its status to Cancelled. This action is available only to the user who created the task.
## The Details tab By using this tab, you can create a new task and view or edit the details of an existing task.
Element Description
Summary The task summary description, which can be used as its ID.
Start date The start date and time of the task.
Internal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the task is hidden from external users.
Due date The date and time when the task should be completed.
Completion (%) The estimation of the task completion, expressed as a percent.
Work group The workgroup the task is assigned to.
Owner The user the task is assigned to. By default, it shows the employee ID of the task creator.
Reminder This check box is not in use.
Remind at (date) This field is not in use.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example: If you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.

Parent A read-only field displaying the parent task this task is related to via the Related tasks tab of the parent task, if applicable.
Project The project associated with this task (or the non-project code indicating that this task is not associated with any project defined to the system); appears if the Projects module is activated.
Project task The particular project task with which this task is associated; appears if the Projects module has been activated. You can select only a project task of the selected project.
Priority The priority level of the task: Low, Normal, or High. These levels are used for informational purposes only; no specific functionality is associated with them.
Status

The status of the task. Select one of the following options:

Open
The task has been assigned to an owner.
Draft
The task has not been assigned yet.
In process
The task owner has started processing the task.
Cancelled
The user who created the task has cancelled it.
Completed
The task owner has finished processing the task.
Category The category of the task.
Completed at The date and time of task completion.
Time spent The time in days, hours, and minutes from task creation to completion.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable overtime The number of billable overtime hours spent on the task.
You can use the editor area, found at the bottom of the tab, to add comments about the task. You can edit the text by using the buttons in the formatting toolbar, which give you the ability to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change its typographical treatment (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour and highlighting), and format it (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists). ### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes your changes to be accepted and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.
## The Related activities tab This tab displays a table that shows activities related to the task.
Button Description
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window, from which you can send an email.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. With an email, it matches the content of the email subject field.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Category The category of the task.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity can be invoiced.
Time spent The number of hours spent to complete the activity.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent to complete the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Work group The work group that the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.
## The Related tasks tab This tab lists the tasks that are related to this task. This task will be set as the **Parent** for the tasks added here.
Button Description
Add related task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window.
Column Description
Subject The description of the task and a link to it.
Status The status of the task.
Start date The start date of the task.
Due date The due date of the task.
Completed at The date and time when the task was actually completed.
Update contract prices (CT503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-contract-prices-ct503000 page You can use this window to update prices for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update contract prices (CT503000) You can use this window to update prices for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to update prices for contracts. You change pricing options of a contract item, by using the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. Then, by using this window, you view the list of contracts that include modified contract item and select those you want to update with these changes. If a contract has the **Active** status you can update pricing options of a setup and renewal items. If a contract has the **Draft** or **Pending activation** status you can update pricing options of a setup, renewal, and recurring items. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Update Updates the contracts you have selected by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Update all Updates all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to select a modified contract item, and review its current pricing details and pricing details used in contracts that include the selected contract item.
Element Description
Item code The unique identifier of a contract item.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the setup item, which can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the base price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Recurring pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and can not be changed later in a contract
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Extra usage pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Item price/percent fields.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts that include the contract item specified in the top part. You can compare the pricing options of the contract item displayed in the Selection area with those used in contracts. You can select contracts by using the check fields in the first column.
Column Description
Identifier A read-only field that displays the contract identifier.
Status A read-only field that displays the status of a contract.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the setup item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Price/percent fields.
Fixed recurring

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Price/percent fields.
Usage price

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Price/percent fields.

Related pages

Windows

Update discounts (AR502500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500 page You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update discounts (AR502500) You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Pending series will appear in the list only if their start date is sooner than the specified pending date. You can update all of them or only the selected ones. While it updates discounts, the system performs the following steps for each selected series: + Removes from the database the last series (the one used before the currently effective series), if any + Marks the currently effective series, if any, as the last one + Marks the pending series as the currently effective one > [!NOTE] > For each discount, effective series, if defined for the same time interval, should not have intersecting lists of customers, items, or other entities. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the discounts you have selected in the table, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the date specified in the Max. pending discount date field.
Process all Processes all the listed discounts, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the Max. pending discount date.
## The top part Here, you can select the latest start date for pending discount series to be made effective.
Element Description
Max. pending discount date The date used to select pending series for updating; only pending series with later start dates than this date will be updated.
## The table This table contains the discount series with start dates that have reached the **Max. pending discount date**.
Column Description
Discount code The code of the discount whose series can be processed.
Series The identifier of the pending series of the discount.
Description The description provided for the series.
Discount by The way the discount is expressed: by percentage or by amount.
Break by

The way the discount breakdown series is specified, which is one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by specified amounts.
Effective date The date when the discount series becomes effective and can be applied to sales orders and invoices.
Last update date The date when the discount was last updated.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Validate customer balances (AR509900) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900 page In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate customer balances (AR509900) In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Validation entails recalculating the balances based on the history records (released customer ledger documents) and matching them to the customer balances stored in the database. The system also uses the open sales orders to validate whether the customer balances exceed the credit limits specified for these customers. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you validate the customer balances after you change the credit validation rules. > [!NOTE] > Also, you may run this process if there is any discrepancy between the customer balance and the total amount of all the released customer documents. Use the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) window to view if there is any discrepancy; use the [Customer history (AR652000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000/) report for details on the customer account history. In the top part, you select a financial period (and, optionally, a customer class), and you can view the list of customers in the table. To validate the balances of all customers in the list, click **Process all**. To validate the balances of only particular customers, select the check boxes next to those customers and click **Process**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Recalculates the balances for the customers you have selected in the table.
Process all Recalculates the balances for all the customers listed in the table.
## The top part You use this part to select a financial period and a customer class for which you want to validate customer balances.
Element Description
Period The financial period starting which you want to validate customer balances. By default, the system selects the earliest financial period that is open in Customer ledger.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to validate customer balances. If you make no selection, customers of all classes will be displayed.
## The table This table lists all customers or the customers of the class you selected.
Button Description
View Customer Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window and displays the selected customer’s account details.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer who has balance to be validated. Click the ID to navigate to the Customers (AR303000) window to see the selected customer’s account details.
Customer class The class to which the customer belongs.
Customer name The name of the customer.

Related pages

Windows

Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000 page You use this window to write off balances or credits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) You use this window to write off balances or credits. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to write off balances or credits. You can select documents by customer, post period, and type of write-off operation. As a result of processing, the system does the following: 1. Generates documents of the **Balance write-off** or **Credit write-off** types depending on write-off operation you have selected. 1. Releases these documents regardless of the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Generates batches of appropriate transactions with the **Unposted** or **Posted** status, depending on the value of the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Applies each generated document to the corresponding document that you have written balance or credit off and closes both documents. For more information, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the write-offs for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes the write-offs for all the listed documents.
## The top part You can use the elements in this part to narrow the list of documents displayed in the table.
Element Description
Type The type of operation. The following types are available: Credit write-off and Balance write-off.
Doc. date The date when the write-offs are performed.
Post period The period to which the write-off transactions should be posted.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch a user is currently logged in. If a user clears the box value, the system displays the documents from all the branches to which the user has access to.
Customer The customer whose balances or credits will be written off. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view the documents of all the customers.
Reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances. By default, the system uses reason codes you specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Limit The maximum balance of a document that may be a subject to the selected write-off operation. By default, it is the value specified for the customer (if selected) in the Write-off limit field in the Customers (AR303000) window. You can enter the specific limit manually, if needed.
Selection total A read-only box that shows the total amount on the selected documents.
## The table This table displays documents that have a balance no greater than the amount specified in the **Limit** field and match other criteria specified in the Selection area. Review the documents that may be subject to write-off.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the document.
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Balance write-off:

Invoice
Created for an invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided.
Credit note
Used for a document that adjusts the credit amount in previous invoices.
Overdue charge
Used for overdue charges.

The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Credit write-off:

Debit note
Created for a document that adjusts the debit amount in previous invoices.
Payment
Created for a payment received from the customer.
Prepayment
Created for a prepayment received from the customer
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. If you click the link, the system opens the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The post period of the document.
Currency

The currency of the document.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Foreign currency balance

The open balance of the document in the foreign currency to which payment was not applied.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Foreign currency amount The amount in foreign currency.
Amount The amount in base currency.
Balance The open balance of the document in the base currency to which payment was not applied.
Balance % Percentage of balance from the amount
Invoice text A detailed description for the document in which the amount will be written off.
Reason code A reason code used.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows